Linguifex

Chlouvānem/Morphology: Difference between revisions

Page Discussion

Chlouvānem/Morphology (view source)

Revision as of 13:12, 2 September 2021

4,275 bytes removed ,  2 September 2021
m
→‎Singularia and pluralia tantum
 
(871 intermediate revisions by 2 users not shown)
Line 1: Line 1:
'''Chlouvānem''' is a highly inflected language with a synthetic morphology. Six parts of speech are traditionally distinguished: nouns, adjectives, verbs, pronouns, numerals, and particles.
'''Chlouvānem''' is a highly inflected language with a synthetic morphology. Five parts of speech are traditionally distinguished: nouns, verbs, pronouns, numerals, and particles. Throughout the page there will be references to the topics treated in the pages on [[Chlouvānem/Syntax|Chlouvānem syntax]], [[Chlouvānem/Positional and motion verbs|positional and motion verbs]], and [[Chlouvānem/Exterior and interior verbs|exterior and interior verbs]].
==Nouns - Halenī ==
{{Chlouvānem sidebar}}
==Nouns (''halenī'') ==
→ ''See [[Lahob languages#Morphology|Lahob languages § Morphology]] for diachronical tables and comparisons with sister languages.''<br/>
→ ''See also [[Chlouvānem/Syntax#Noun_phrase|Chlouvānem syntax § Noun phrase]] for discussion of case usage.''


The [[Chlouvānem]] noun (''haloe'', pl. ''halenī'') is highly inflected: it declines for three numbers (singular, dual, plural), and eleven cases (direct, vocative, accusative, ergative, genitive, translative, exessive, essive, dative, ablative, and locative). Nouns also have grammatical gender, being divided in three classes (called ''dragon'', ''lotus'', and ''parrot'' based on nouns included in them<ref>Dragon is ''kaṃšūs'', lotus is ''yujam'', and parrot is ''geltah''.</ref>).
The [[Chlouvānem]] noun (''haloe'', pl. ''halenī'') is highly inflected - it declines for:

* Three numbers:
:: '''Singular''' (''emibausire smoḍūm'')
:: '''Dual''' (''danyausire smoḍūm'')
:: '''Plural''' (''tailyausire smoḍūm'')
* Twelve cases:

:: '''Direct''' (''daradhūkire dirūnnevya'')
:: '''Vocative''' (''halausire dirūnnevya'')

:: '''Accusative''' (''dṛṣokire dirūnnevya'')
:: '''Ergative''' (''darinūkire dirūnnevya'')
:: '''Genitive''' (''cārūkire dirūnnevya'')

:: '''Translative''' (''najamarcūkire dirūnnevya'')

:: '''Exessive''' (''nanijamarcūkire dirūnnevya'')
:: '''Essive''' (''jalausire dirūnnevya'')
:: '''Dative''' (''męlyausire dirūnnevya'')
:: '''Ablative''' (''tųlunūkire dirūnnevya'')
:: '''Locative''' (''yuñcūkire dirūnnevya'')
:: '''Instrumental''' (''drausire dirūnnevya'')


There are a few nouns which lack number; a few are singularia tantum and lack a plural (e.g. ''hærūm'' lips), other ones are plural only - most notably these include all ethnicities (e.g. ''chlouvānem'', which is also an irregular plural). The singular is made by using the genitive form attributed to ''lila'' (person), e.g. ''chlouvānumi lila'' (a Chlouvānem).
There are a few nouns which lack number; a few are singularia tantum and lack a plural (e.g. ''hærūm'' lips), other ones are plural only - most notably these include all ethnicities (e.g. ''chlǣvānem'', which is also an irregular plural). The singular is made by using the genitive form attributed to ''lila'' (person), e.g. ''chlǣvānumi lila'' (a Chlouvānem).<br/>


===Gender===
Chlouvānem does not have grammatical gender, and there are only a few natural gender terms. There are thirteen different noun declensions, but most of them only have few small differences. Chlouvānem declensions are predictable from the ending of the direct case noun, and they're categorized depending on their endings as ''s-'', ''m-'', or ''h-nouns''<ref>These are the remnants of a former gender system present in Proto-Lahob, still evident in other Lahob languages; unlike others in the family, Chlouvānem did not become genderless because of losing gender marking on nouns, but because it lost concordance anywhere else.</ref>: inside these broad categories, different declensions are distinguished by the thematic vowel of the suffix: ''a'', ''u'', or ''i'' for ''s-'' and ''m-nouns'', and ''a'', ''e'', ''u'', ''i'' for ''h-nouns''.
Genders and declensions are dependent on the form of the noun. Due to the prevailing endings in direct case, ''dragon'' nouns are also called the ''s-class''; ''lotus'' nouns the ''m-class''; and ''parrot'' nouns the ''h-class'':


'''Dragon nouns (kaṃšūlñī halenī)''':
===S-nouns - Sasą lā halenī===
* '''1s''': nouns ending in ''-as'' or ''-ās'', as well as Eastern toponyms in ''-o''
There are some traits which are common to all nominal declensions: the vocative is only distinct in the singular; in the dual there is also no distinction between translative and dative, essive and locative, and between exessive, ablative, and instrumental. In the plural, the exessive and ablative also share the same form, as do the essive plural and the ergative dual.
* '''2s''': nouns ending in ''-us'' or ''-ūs''
{{col-begin}}
* '''3s''': nouns ending in ''-is'' or ''-īs''
{{col-break}}
* '''4s''': nouns ending in ''-oe''
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
'''Lotus nouns (yujamñī halenī)''':
|+1-s (-as, -ās)
* '''1m''': nouns ending in ''-am'', ''-em'', ''-ām'', ''-ėm'' (or ''-n'')
* '''2m''': nouns ending in ''-um'' or ''-ūm'' (or ''-n'')
* '''3m''': nouns ending in ''-im'' or ''-īm'' (or ''-n'')
* '''4m''': nouns ending in ''-ai''
'''Parrot nouns (geltañī halenī)''':
* '''1h''': nouns ending in ''-a'', ''-ah'', ''-ā'', or ''-āh''
* '''2h''': nouns ending in ''-ė'' or ''-eh'' (plus some diminutives ending in ''-ėh'')
* '''3h''': nouns ending in ''-uh'' or ''-ūh'', and a few words of Dabuke origin in ''-u'' (mostly only used regionally in the West)
* '''4h''': nouns ending in ''-ih'' or ''-īh'' (plus a few exceptional ones in ''-i'')
* '''5h''': nouns ending in ''-a'' which have ablaut-conditioned variations in their stems in different cases
 
===Dragon nouns - Kaṃšūlñī halenī===
The first declension of dragon nouns is also the most common one for that gender. Like all other nominal declensions, the vocative is only distinct in the singular, and dual and plural have the same forms for translative, exessive, essive, dative, ablative, and locative.
 
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! rowspan=2 | Case !! colspan=3 | 1-s nouns !! colspan=3 | 2-s nouns !! colspan=3 | 3-s nouns !! colspan=3 | 4-s nouns
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
! <small>Direct</small>
| '''prātas'''<br/><small>''"wind"''</small> || rowspan=2 | prātāt || rowspan=2 | prāte
|-
|-
! Direct
! <small>Vocative</small>
| '''prātas''' <small>''"wind"''</small> || prātudi || prāte || '''kældus''' <small>''"wax"''</small> || kældudi || kælduvī || '''kumis''' <small>''"bamboo"''</small> || kumidi || kumiye || '''haloe''' <small>''"name"''</small> || haloedi || halenī
| prātau
|-
|-
! Vocative
! <small>Accusative</small>
| prātau || prātudi || prāte || kældu || kældudi || kælduvī || kumi || kumidi || kumiye || haloe || haloedi || halenī
| prātu || prātāṣa || prataih
|-
|-
! Accusative
! <small>Ergative</small>
| prātu || prātudau || prātānu || kældau || kældudau || kældūnu || kumiu || kumidau || kumiānu || halenu || haloedau || halenænu
| prātei || prātāya || prātān
|-
|-
! Ergative
! <small>Genitive</small>
| prātei || prātudeni || prātān || kældovei || kældudeni || kældān || kumiei || kumideni || kumiān || halenei || haloedeni || halenān
| prāti || prāteva || prātumi
|-
|-
! Genitive
! <small>Translative</small>
| prāti || prātudais || prātumi || kældavi || kældudais || kældoumi || kumieyi || kumideis || kumiumi || halenies || haloedais || halenyumi
| prātan || prātaus || prātāmān
|-
|-
! Translative
! <small>Exessive</small>
| prātan || prātyoh || prātyoh || kældun || kældyoh || kældyoh || kumian || kumiyoh || kumiyoh || halenan || halenyoh || halenyoh
| prātat || prātābhan || prātenīs
|-
|-
! Exessive
! <small>Essive</small>
| prātat || prātyās || prātyās || kældut || kældyās || kældyās || kumiæt || kumiyās || kumiyās || halenat || halenyās || halenyās
| prātą || prātigin || prātāya
|-
|-
! Essive
! <small>Dative</small>
| prātą || prātvin || prātvin || kældęs || kældvin || kældvin || kumiæs || kumivin || kumivin || halen || halemvin || halemvin
| prātom || prātaus || prātasām
|-
|-
! Dative
! <small>Ablative</small>
| prātui || prāteiti || prāteiti || kældui || kældeiti || kældeiti || kumiui || kumievuti || kumievuti || halenui || haleneiti || haleneiti
| prātų || prātābhan || prātenīs
|-
|-
! Ablative
! <small>Locative</small>
| prātų || prātenīs || prātenīs || kældų || kældunīs || kældunīs || kumių || kumienīs || kumienīs || halenų || haleninīs || haleninīs
| prāte || prātigin || prātilīm
|-
|-
! Locative
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| prāte || prātilīm || prātilīm || kælduve || kældilīm || kældilīm || kumie || kumiælīm || kumiælīm || halenive || haleṃlīm || haleṃlīm
| prātap || prātābhan || prātenīka
|}
|}
 
{{col-break}}
===Lotus nouns - Yujamñī halenī===
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
{| class="wikitable"
|+2-s (-us, -ūs)
|-
|-
! rowspan=2 | Case !! colspan=3 | 1-m nouns !! colspan=3 | 2-m nouns !! colspan=3 | 3-m nouns !! colspan=3 | 4-m nouns
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
! <small>Direct</small>
| '''haɂrus'''<br/><small>''"squid"''</small> || rowspan=2 | haɂrūt || rowspan=2 | haɂraus
|-
|-
! Direct
! <small>Vocative</small>
| '''yujam''' <small>''"lotus"''</small> || yujandi || yujye || '''tūlum''' <small>''"worm"''</small> || tūlundi || tūluvye || '''jāyim''' <small>''"girl"''</small> || jāyiñxi || jāyiñe || '''lunai''' <small>''"tea"''</small> || lunaidi || lunāye
| haɂru
|-
|-
! Vocative
! <small>Accusative</small>
| yujam || yujandi || yujye || tūlu || tūlundi || tūluvye || jāyī || jāyiñxi || jāyiñe || lunai || lunaidi || lunāye
| haɂravu || haɂrūṣa || haɂravih
|-
|-
! Accusative
! <small>Ergative</small>
| yujamu || yujandau || yujāmūn || tūlau || tūlundau || tūlumūn || jāyimu || jāyiñxau || jāyimin || lunāyu || lunaidau || lunainū
| haɂrave || haɂrūya || haɂrūn
|-
|-
! Ergative
! <small>Genitive</small>
| yujamei || yujandeni || yujamān || tūluṃs || tūlundeni || tūlumān || jāyimei || jāyiñxeni || jāyimān || lunea || lunaideni || lunæyān
| haɂravi || haɂragva || haɂrǣmi
|-
|-
! Genitive
! <small>Translative</small>
| yujami || yujandais || yujammi || tūlumvi || tūlundais || tūloumi || jāyimi || jāyiñxeis || jāyiñumi || lunayi || lunaidais || lunæyumi
| haɂrun || haɂrugus || haɂromān
|-
|-
! Translative
! <small>Exessive</small>
| yujaman || yujyoh || yujyoh || tūluman || tūluvyoh || tūluvyoh || jāyiman || jāyiñyoh || jāyiñyoh || lunāyan || lunāyoh || lunāyoh
| haɂrut || haɂrobhan || haɂruṇīs<sup>1</sup>
|-
|-
! Exessive
! <small>Essive</small>
| yujamat || yujamyās || yujamyās || tūlumat || tūlumyās || tūlumyās || jāyimæt || jāyiñyās || jāyiñyās || lunāyat || lunāyās || lunāyās
| haɂrą || haɂrugin || haɂrūya
|-
|-
! Essive
! <small>Dative</small>
| yujamą || yujamvin || yujamvin || tūlumą || tūlumvin || tūlumvin || jāyimą || jāyimvin || jāyimvin || lunąis || lunaivin || lunaivin
| haɂravom || haɂrugus || haɂrusām
|-
|-
! Dative
! <small>Ablative</small>
| yujamui || yujyeiti || yujyeiti || tūlumui || tūluvyeiti || tūluvyeiti || jāyimui || jāyimėti || jāyimėti || lunāmui || lunāyeiti || lunāyeiti
| haɂrų || haɂrobhan || haɂruṇīs<sup>1</sup>
|-
|-
! Ablative
! <small>Locative</small>
| yujamų || yujamñis || yujamñis || tūlumų || tūlumñis || tūlumñis || jāyimų || jāyimñīs || jāyimñīs || lunāyų || lunaiñīs || lunaiñīs
| haɂrave || haɂrugin || haɂrulīm
|-
|-
! Locative
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| yujamñe || yujailīm || yujailīm || tūlumñe || tuluilīm || tuluilīm || jāyimñe || jāyælīm || jāyælīm || lunaiñe || lunæyilīm || lunæyilīm
| haɂrup || haɂrobhan || haɂruṇīka<sup>1</sup>
|}
|}
 
{{col-break}}
Note that all lotus nouns with '''-n''' have their direct and vocative plural forms ''identical'' to the singular ones - all other inflections (including the dual) are the same as the other nouns. Thus e.g. '''samin''' may be either ''child'' or ''children'', and it is usually the verb that marks the number - compare ''samin mālchė'' "the kid runs" and ''samin mālchęn'' "the kids run".<br/>These unmarked plurals are regular - note that ''hulin'' (woman) has both a regular plural (''hulin''), used in a wider scope (e.g. ''chlouvānumi hulin'' "Chlouvānem women") and an irregular plural (''hilāni'') used in other contexts (e.g. ''nanā hilāni'' "those women there").
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
 
|+3-s (-is, -īs)
===Parrot nouns - Geltañī halenī===
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! rowspan=2 | Case !! colspan=3 | 1-h nouns !! colspan=3 | 2-h nouns !! colspan=3 | 3-h nouns !! colspan=3 | 4-h nouns !! colspan=3 | 5-h nouns
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
! <small>Direct</small>
| '''ḍhogis'''<br/><small>''"monument"''</small> || rowspan=2 | ḍhogīt || rowspan=2 | ḍhogais
|-
|-
! Direct
! <small>Vocative</small>
| '''māra''' <small>''"mango"''</small> || māradi || mārai || '''javileh''' <small>''"apple"''</small> || javiladi || javilei || '''camūh''' <small>''"group"''</small> || camūdi || camūvai || '''xamih''' <small>''"arrow"''</small> || xamīdi || xamīye || '''lila''' <small>''"person"''</small> || lildi || leliė
| ḍhogi
|-
|-
! Vocative
! <small>Accusative</small>
| māra || māradi || mārai || javili || javiladi || javilei || camū || camūdi || camūvai || xamī || xamīdi || xamīye || lila || lildi || leliė
| ḍhogayu || ḍhogīṣa || ḍhogaih
|-
|-
! Accusative
! <small>Ergative</small>
| māru || māradau || mārānu || javilu || javiladau || javilėnu || camou || camūdau || camounu || xamīyu || xamīdau || xameinu || lilu || lildau || leliu
| ḍhogaye || ḍhogīya || ḍhogīn
|-
|-
! Ergative
! <small>Genitive</small>
| mārei || māradeni || mārān || javiliai || javiladeni || javilėn || camūvei || camūdeni || camoun || xamīyi || xamīdeni || xamein || lilei || lildeni || leliei
| ḍhogayi || ḍhogajña || ḍhogyumi
|-
|-
! Genitive
! <small>Translative</small>
| māri || māradais || mārumi || javili || javiladais || javilumi || camūvi || camūdais || camūmi || xamīyi || xamīdais || xamiūmi || leli || lildais || laili
| ḍhogin || ḍhogigus || ḍhogemān
|-
|-
! Translative
! <small>Exessive</small>
| māran || māryāh || māryāh || javilan || javilyāh || javilyāh || camūn || camūyāh || camūyāh || xamīn || xamīyāh || xamīyāh || lilan || lelian || lelian
| ḍhogit || ḍhogebhan || ḍhogenīs
|-
|-
! Exessive
! <small>Essive</small>
| mārat || māryās || māryās || javilet || javilyās || javilyās || camūt || camūyās || camūyās || xamīt || xamīyās || xamīyās || lilat || leliat || leliat
| ḍhogę || ḍhogigin || ḍhogīya
|-
|-
! Essive
! <small>Dative</small>
| māręs || mārvin || mārvin || javilęs || javilein || javilein || camųs || camūvin || camūvin || xamįs || xamīvin || xamīvin || liląs || lailąs || lailąs
| ḍhogayom || ḍhogigus || ḍhogisām
|-
|-
! Dative
! <small>Ablative</small>
| mārui || mārauti || mārauti || javilui || javiliauti || javiliauti || camvui || camvauti || camvauti || xamiui || xamiauti || xamiauti || lilui || leliui || leliui
| ḍhogyų || ḍhogebhan || ḍhogenīs
|-
|-
! Ablative
! <small>Locative</small>
| mārų || mārenīs || mārenīs || javilių || javilenīs || javilenīs || camųu || camūnīs || camūnīs || xamių || xamīnīs || xamīnīs || lilų || lelių || lelių
| ḍhogaye || ḍhogigin || ḍhogilīm
|-
|-
! Locative
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| māre || mārilīm || mārilīm || javiliye || javililīm || javililīm || camve || camuilīm || camuilīm || xamie || xamīlīm || xamīlīm || lile || laile || laile
| ḍhogip || ḍhogebhan || ḍhoginīka
|}
|}
{{col-end}}
Table notes:
# The ending is ''-unīs/-unīka''; the '''n''' → '''ṇ''' shift is a case of regular saṃdhi.
Also note that modern borrowings ending in [s] typically add a further case ending, e.g. Skyrdagor ''valtasz'' (nunatak) becomes Chlouvānem ''valtasas'' (same meaning), declining as ''valtasau'', ''valtasu'', ''valtasei''...


===Exceptions for duals and plurals===
===M-nouns - Mamą lā halenī===
A few Chlouvānem nouns have irregular plurals:
{{col-begin}}
* The word ''chlouvānem'' itself is plural-only and irregular; direct and vocative are in ''-em'', but all other cases decline as a standard plural 1h noun (e.g. accusative ''chlouvānānu'', ergative ''chlouvānān'', genitive ''chlouvānumi'');
{{col-break}}
* ''maila'' “water” does not have a dual form outside of colloquial use (where ''mailadi'' is used with the meaning of “two glasses of water”) and has the irregular plural ''mailtiąa''. It declines as a ''singular'' 1h noun, with two exceptions, namely accusative in ''-ąu'' instead of expected *-ahu and genitive in ''-ąi'' instead of expected *-ahi. This plural form is actually common, used when talking about bodies of water in an area, water layers, glasses of water, and a few minor idiomatic uses (e.g. ''taili mailtiahe hilæflulke'', lit. “to arrive by crossing many waters”, meaning “to have had much experience”).
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
*''hulin'' "woman" has both a regular plural (''hulin''), used in a wider scope (e.g. ''chlouvānumi hulin'' "Chlouvānem women") and an irregular plural (''hilāni'') used in other contexts (e.g. ''nanā hilāni'' "those women there").
|+1-m (-am, -ām)
* ''resan'' "pig" and ''liken'' "arm" both have irregular plurals with vowel change: ''ryasan'' and ''læcin'' respectively.
* ''švas'' "animal (including humans)" pluralizes as ''švai'', as if it were a parrot noun; all cases except for direct and vocative are however regular.
* There are some pluralia tantum: ''pārye'' “hair”, ''kāraṇḍhai'' “guts”, and all ethnonyms; also ''agṇyaucai'' (perfect exterior participle, parrot plural, of ''gṇyauke'' “to give birth”) when used with the meaning of “sons and daughters”.
* A few nouns are singularia tantum: ''hærṣūs'' “lips”, ''maula'' “breasts”, ''kanai'' “spices”, ''paʔeh'' “dust”, ''nāmvāvi'' “dust (made by crushing something)”, ''måris'' “ash”, ''ñailūh'' “ice”.
* Dvandva compounds are usually all dual and pluralizable - like ''yāṇḍamaišñukam'' “genitals”, or also many dyadic kinship terms (e.g. ''maihāmeinā'' “daughter and mother”) - but some of them are inherently “singular” and therefore are dual only, like ''lillamurḍhyāyunya'' (how some philosophical Yunyalīlti currents refer to the yunya “nature” and the ''lillamurḍhyā'' “natural harmony” as two aspects of the same thing). Note that dual inflections are not present on the noun itself in direct and vocative forms.
* Toponyms (except inherently dual or plural ones), personal names, and miscellaneous things that are semantically only singular (like many Yunyalīlti concepts, e.g. ''yunya'' or ''lillamurḍhyā'') are found exclusively in the singular.
 
==Adjectives and adverbs==
Adjectives, in Chlouvānem, are actually a subset of nouns which have different forms depending on gender. They can function as attributes to nouns, but they can also be used without any noun, usually replacing it (and taking its gender) as a means of anaphora. If they are related to people, they take parrot gender: the common explanation is that they stand for <small>ADJ.</small> + ''lila'' (person).<br/>
Adjectives decline much like nouns, except for a few small differences. Their dragon gender form, direct case, singular number, is the citation form.
 
=== Dragon gender (kaṃšūlñis) ===
There are three main adjectival declensions: '''-as''', '''-us''', and '''-is'''; a small subset of '''-es''' adjectives (mainly ordinal numbers) follows the '''-is''' pattern except for plural direct and vocative (having ''-eye'' instead of ''-ī'') and having ''-e'' as a thematic vowel instead of ''-i'' before endings.<br/>The irregular adjective ''līleskais'' (new) declines as if it were *līleskis.
 
Translative, exessive, essive, dative, ablative, and locative forms are exactly the same as for nouns. Forms that are different from the nominal declensions are in '''bold''':
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! rowspan=2 | Case !! colspan=3 | 1-s adjectives !! colspan=3 | 2-s adjectives !! colspan=3 | 3-s adjectives
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
! <small>Direct</small>
| '''yujam'''<br/><small>''"lotus"''</small> || rowspan=2 | yujivā || rowspan=2 | yujāk
|-
|-
! Direct
! <small>Vocative</small>
| prātūkas <small>''"windy"''</small> || '''prātūkadi''' || prātūke || mālthus <small>''"last"''</small> || mālthudi || mālthuvī || tarlausis <small>''"scientific"''</small> || tarlausidi || '''tarlausī'''
| yujā
|-
|-
! Vocative
! <small>Accusative</small>
| '''prātūka''' || '''prātūkadi''' || prātūke || mālthu || mālthudi || mālthuvī || tarlausi || tarlausidi || '''tarlausī'''
| yujamu || yujmes || yujmaih
|-
|-
! Accusative
! <small>Ergative</small>
| prātūku || '''prātūkadu''' || prātūkānu || mālthau || mālthudau || mālthūnu || tarlausiu || tarlausidau || tarlausiānu
| yujmæ || yujmyan || yujamūn
|-
|-
! Ergative
! <small>Genitive</small>
| '''prātūkai''' || '''prātūkaden''' || prātūkān || mālthoṃs || mālthudeni || mālthān || tarlausiei || tarlausideni || tarlausiān
| yujami || yujmeva || yujaṃrān
|-
|-
! Genitive
! <small>Translative</small>
| '''prātūkuyi''' || '''prātūkadais''' || prātūkumi || '''mālthuyi''' || mālthudais || '''mālthūmi''' || '''tarlausiai''' || tarlausideis || '''tarlausieis'''
| yujaman || yujmį || yujamān
|}
=== Lotus gender (yujamñis) ===
Lotus gender adjectives follow the same patterns as dragon ones — their endings are '''-am''', '''-um''', '''-im''' ('''-em''').
Differences in bold are from lotus gender nouns.
 
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! rowspan=2 | Case !! colspan=3 | 1-m adjectives !! colspan=3 | 2-m adjectives !! colspan=3 | 3-m adjectives
! <small>Exessive</small>
| yujamat || yujabhan || yujmenīs
|-
|-
! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !!  Singular !! Dual !! Plural
! <small>Essive</small>
| yujmą || yujmenne || yujmyan
|-
|-
! Direct
! <small>Dative</small>
| prātūkam <small>''"windy"''</small> || prātūkandi || '''prātūkeñe''' || mālthum <small>''"last"''</small> || mālthundi || mālthuvye || tarlausim <small>''"scientific"''</small> || tarlausiñxi || tarlausiñe
| yujamom || yujmį || yujaṃsām
|-
|-
! Vocative
! <small>Ablative</small>
| prātūkam || prātūkandi || '''prātūkeñe''' || mālthu || mālthundi || mālthuvye || tarlausi || tarlausiñxi || tarlausiñe
| yujamų || yujabhan || yujmenīs
|-
|-
! Accusative
! <small>Locative</small>
| prātūkamu || '''prātūkandu''' || '''prātūkūnu''' || mālthau || mālthundau || mālthumūn || tarlausimu || tarlausiñxau || tarlausimān
| yujaṃrye || yujmenne || yujmilīm
|-
|-
! Ergative
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| '''prātūkemei''' || '''prātūkanden''' || '''prātūkūnen''' || mālthuṃs || mālthundeni || mālthumān || tarlausimei || tarlausiñxeni || tarlausimān
| yujamap || yujabhan || yujaṃrīka
|-
! Genitive
| '''prātūkañi''' ||  prātūkandais || prātūkumi || '''mālthuñi''' || mālthundais || mālthoumi || '''tarlauseñi''' || tarlausiñxeis || '''tarlausemñi'''
|}
|}
=== Parrot gender (geltañis) ===
{{col-break}}
Parrot gender adjectives, unlike the other two genders, do not have the ''-e-'' subdeclension, having '''-ah''', '''-uh''', and '''-eh''' as its three declensional endings (''-is''/''-es'' and ''-im''/''-em'' all correspond to ''-eh'').
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
Differences in bold are from parrot gender nouns.
|+2-m (-um, -ūm)
 
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! rowspan=2 | Case !! colspan=3 | 1-h adjectives !! colspan=3 | 2-h adjectives !! colspan=3 | 3-h adjectives
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
! <small>Direct</small>
| '''tūlum'''<br/><small>''"worm"''</small> || rowspan=2 | tūlvivā || rowspan=2 | tūlūk
|-
|-
! Direct
! <small>Vocative</small>
| prātūkah <small>''"windy"''</small> || prātūkadi || '''prātūkæh''' || mālthuh <small>''"last"''</small> || mālthudi || mālthuvai || tarlauseh <small>''"scientific"''</small> || tarlausadi || tarlausei
| tūlve
|-
|-
! Vocative
! <small>Accusative</small>
| prātūka || prātūkadi || '''prātūkæh''' || mālthu || mālthudi || mālthuvai || tarlausi || tarlausadi || tarlausei
| tūlumu || tūlves || tūluyih
|-
|-
! Accusative
! <small>Ergative</small>
| prātūku || prātūkadau || '''prātūkaun''' || mālthou || mālthudau || mālthounu || tarlausu || tarlausadau || tarlausėnu
| tūluga || tūlvyan || tūlumūn
|-
|-
! Ergative
! <small>Genitive</small>
| prātūkei || '''prātūkaden''' || '''prātūkæn''' || '''mālthuve''' || mālthudeni || mālthoun || tarlausiai || tarlausaeni || tarlausėn
| tūlumi || tūlveva || tūluṃrān
|-
|-
! Genitive
! <small>Translative</small>
| prātūki || prātūkadais || prātūkumi || mālthuvi || mālthudais || mālthumi || '''tarlauseah''' || '''tarlausadæs''' || tarlausumi
| tūluman || tūlvį || tūlumān
|}
===Irregular adjectives===
"Irregular" adjectives are a closed group of words that have their own declensional paradigm. They are all declined for gender (though only in direct, vocative, accusative, ergative, and genitive) but ''not'' for number. Unlike other adjectives, the citation form is the ''parrot gender'' and not the dragon; they end in ''-iā'' or ''-i'' in parrot direct, ''-em'' (rarely ''-im'' or ''-am'') in lotus direct, and ''-es'' (rarely ''-as'') in dragon direct.<br/>
These words are:
* The possessives: '''''liliā''''' - ''lilem'' - ''liles'' (my, mine), '''''sāmiā''''' - ''sāmim'' - ''sāmes'' (your(s) (sg)), '''''demiā''''' - ''demim'' - ''demes'' (one's own), '''''tamiā''''' - ''tamim'' - ''tames'' (his, her(s), its), '''''maiyā''''' - ''maiyem'' - ''maiyes'' (our(s)), '''''najyā''''' - ''nagem'' - ''nages'' (your(s) (pl)), '''''tomiā''''' - ''tomim'' - ''tomes'' (their(s))
* The Classical/modern demonstratives: '''''nenė''''' - ''nenayem'' - ''nenayes'' (proximal), '''''nunū''''' - ''numvem'' - ''numves'' (medial), '''''nanā''''' - ''nanām'' - ''nanās'' (distal)
* The archaic demonstratives: '''''ami''''' - ''em'' - ''es'' (proximal), '''''uteni''''' - ''utam'' - ''utas'' (medial), '''''āteni''''' - ''ātam'' - ''ātas'' (distal)
* All compounds with one of these (most commonly ''ami'').
 
There are three main declensional paradigms: all of them follow the ''ā-paradigm'' except the parrot forms of ''nenė'' and ''nunū''. Note that ''ami'', ''uteni'' and ''āteni'' keep the palatalization also in the locative case (e.g. ''amiea''):
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! rowspan=2 | Case !! colspan=3 | ā-paradigm !! ė-paradigm !! ū-paradigm
! <small>Exessive</small>
| tūlumat || tūlubhan || tūlvenīs
|-
|-
! Parrot !! Lotus !! Dragon !! Parrot !! Parrot
! <small>Essive</small>
| tūlų || tūlunne || tūlvyan
|-
|-
! Direct<br/>Vocative
! <small>Dative</small>
| '''liliā''' || '''lilem''' || '''liles''' || '''nenė''' || '''nunū'''
| tūlumom || tūlvį || tūluṃsām
|-
|-
! Accusative
! <small>Ablative</small>
| liliau || lilemu || lileṣu || nenæyu || nunūyu
| tūlumų || tūlubhan || tūlvenīs
|-
|-
! Ergative
! <small>Locative</small>
| lilie || lilemie || lilesie || nenæye || nunūye
| tūluṃrye || tūlunne || tūlulīm
|-
|-
! Genitive
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| liliai || lilemñi || lilesiai || neniai || nunūyai
| tūlumap || tūlubhan || tūluṃrīka
|}
{{col-break}}
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
|+3-m (-im, -īm)
|-
|-
! Translative
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
| colspan=3 style="text-align: center;" | liliān || nenėn || nunūn
|-
|-
! Exessive
! <small>Direct</small>
| colspan=3 style="text-align: center;" | liliāt || nenėt || nunūt
| '''jāyim'''<br/><small>''"girl"''</small> || rowspan=2 | jāyīvā || rowspan=2 | jāyīk
|-
|-
! Essive
! <small>Vocative</small>
| colspan=3 style="text-align: center;" | liliąa || nenęe || nunųu
| jāyī
|-
|-
! Dative
! <small>Accusative</small>
| colspan=3 style="text-align: center;" | liliåh || neneah || nunouh
| jāyimu || jājñes<sup>1</sup> || jāyīh
|-
|-
! Ablative
! <small>Ergative</small>
| colspan=3 style="text-align: center;" | liliąu || nenėhu || nunūvu
| jājña<sup>1</sup> || jāyiyan || jāyimūn
|-
|-
! Locative
! <small>Genitive</small>
| colspan=3 style="text-align: center;" | lilea || nenėhea || nunūvea
| jāyimi || jājñeva<sup>1</sup> || jāyiṃran
|}
 
===Adverbs===
Adjectives are turned into adverbs by removing the ending (-as/us/is/es) and adding '''-ęe''' (''-nęe'' after vowel-final stems). Thus:
* ''tarlausis'' (scientific) → ''tarlausęe'' (scientifically, according to science)
* ''namęliausis'' (stakanovist) → ''namęliausęe'' (continuously; without any break)
* ''prātūkas'' (windy) → ''prātūkęe'' (windy; like the wind)
 
A few ''-us'' adjectives keep the ''-u-'' (and thus add ''-nęe''):
* ''mālthus'' (last) → ''mālthunęe'' ((as) last; at last, finally)
 
There are also some irregular adverbs, made from other speech parts:
* ''chlærūm'' (light) → ''chlære'' (easily) (but note its synonym ''chlærausęe'' from the related adjective ''chlærausis'' (easy))
* ''dilas'' (same) → ''diledile'' (exactly the same way; emphatic version of ''dilęe'' but more common)
* ''ṣati'' (way, mode) suffixed to a possessive adjective forms ''liliāṣati'' (from my point of view; my way; in my opinion), ''sāmiāṣati'' (from your point of view; your way; in your opinion), ''demiāṣati'', ''tamiāṣati'', and so on.
 
====Underived adverbs====
Some adverbs are not derived from any other part of speech. They include:
* All adverbial correlatives;
* ''flære'' (yesterday), ''amyære'' (today), and ''menire'' (tomorrow)
* ''mådviṣe'' (before), ''kaminæne'' (now), and ''færviṣe'' (after)
* Some adverbs formed by onomatopoeia or sound symbolism (and usually reduplicated) like ''rarāre'' (roaring) or ''tanetane'' (barefoot).
 
===Undeclinable adjectives===
A few common words may be used attributively just like adjectives, but they do not decline. Most of them end in either ''-a'' or ''-i'':
* ''cami'' - great, large (figurative), important
* ''lalla'' - high, higher, next
* ''chāra'' - good (and ''chloucæm'' (better))
* ''taili'' - many, much
* ''nanū'' - more
* ''kaili'' - most
* ''ṣūbha'' - few, little
* ''lьvyamna'' - far, distant
* ''yamei'' - "honorific" adjective
Note that ''cami'', ''taili'', and ''kaili'', in some (but not all) Archaic Chlouvānem texts, have a singular-only declension based on the irregular one of ''ami - em - es''. Most probably this was an analogic feature of a few pre-Classical standardization Chlouvānem dialects of 2000 years ago.
 
===Comparatives and superlatives===
There are two methods for building comparatives and superlatives: a synthetic and an analytic one. Synthetic comparatives, except for a few irregular forms, are extremely rare in spoken Chlouvānem and only used in very formal written language. Adjectives that either refer to the presence or absence of a quality do not have comparatives or superlatives, nor does the "honorific adjective" ''yamei''.
 
Analytic comparatives are made by using either '''nanū''' (more) or '''ovet''' (less) in front of the adjective; the compared term is in accusative case and followed by the comparative particle '''en'''; the superlative is formed by using '''yaivu en''' (than all) as the compared term.
Adverbs use the same method (e.g. ''chlære'' (easily) → ''nanū chlære'' → ''yaivu en nanū chlære''), but "than all" in superlatives is usually omitted, therefore they use ''nanū'' also with a superlative meaning.
 
Absolute superlatives (very,...) are formed by reduplicating the adjective (or, colloquially, part of it, like for ''ñæñuchlim'' "beautiful" → ''ñæñu-ñæñuchlim'') or by putting ''taili'' (many, much) in front:
: ''kaṣrūm saṃhāram'' "handsome boy" → ''kaṣrūm kaṣrūm saṃhāram'' "very handsome boy" (or ''taili kaṣrūm saṃhāram'')
: ''ñæñuchlim laleichim'' "beautiful wife" → ''ñæñuchlim ñæñuchlim laleichim'' "very beautiful wife" (or ''taili ñæñuchlim laleichim'')
: ''taili naviṣya'' "many books" → ''taili taili naviṣya'' "a lot of books"
 
Synthetic comparatives are formed with the suffix '''-apus''' (for ''-as'' and ''-us'' adjectives) or '''-epus''' (for ''-is'' adjectives). The compared term is always accusative + ''en'':
* ''prātūkas'' (windy) → ''prātūkapus'' (windier)
* ''kurgus'' (noisy) → ''kurgapus'' (noisier)
* ''chlærausis'' (easy) → ''chlærausepus'' (easier)
 
Synthetic superlatives use '''-ækṣasis''' (for ''-as'' adjectives) or '''-īkṣasis''' (for ''-us'' and ''-is'' adjectives):
* ''prātūkas'' → ''prātūkækṣasis'' (the windiest)
* ''kurgus'' → ''kurgīkṣasis'' (the noisiest)
* ''chlærausis'' → ''chlærausīkṣasis'' (the easiest)
 
Synthetic comparatives and superlatives for adverbs use respectively '''-ven''' and '''-eten''':
* ''chlærausęe'' (easily) → ''chlærausiven'' (more easily) → ''chlærauseten'' (most easily)
 
====Irregular forms====
There are seven irregular adjectives which are only used with the synthetic comparatives, all irregularly formed:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! Positive !! Comparative !! Superlative
! <small>Translative</small>
| jāyiman || jāyį || jāyimān
|-
|-
| ''ñikas'' (small) || rowspan=2 | ''isis'' (smaller; fewer, less) || rowspan=2  | ''iñekṣis'' (smallest; fewest, least)
! <small>Exessive</small>
| jāyimat || jāyibhan || jājñenīs<sup>1</sup>
|-
|-
| ''ṣubha'' <small><sub>indecl.</sub></small> (few, little)
! <small>Essive</small>
| jāyį || jāyinne || jāyiyan
|-
|-
| ''spragnyas'' (large) || ''samvaris'' (larger) || ''sasprāsis'' (largest)
! <small>Dative</small>
| jāyimom || jāyį || jāyiṃsam
|-
|-
| ''garpas'' (bad) || ''grašcasis'' (worse) || ''gugārasis'' (worst)
! <small>Ablative</small>
| jāyimų || jāyibhan || jājñenīs<sup>1</sup>
|-
|-
| ''chāra'' <small><sub>indecl.</sub></small> (good) || ''chloucæm'' <small><sub>indecl.</sub></small> (better) || ''chloucækṣis'' (best)
! <small>Locative</small>
| jāyiṃrye || jāyinne || jāyilīm
|-
|-
| ''lьvyamna'' <small><sub>indecl.</sub></small> (far) || ''liādas'' (farther, further) || ''lilьvaisis'' (farthest, furthest)
! <small>Instrumental</small>
|-
| jāyimap || jāyibhan || jāyiṃrīka
| ''taili'' <small><sub>indecl.</sub></small> (many, much) || ''nanū'' <small><sub>indecl.</sub></small> (more) || ''kaili'' <small><sub>indecl.</sub></small> (most)
|}
|}
{{col-end}}
{
Table notes:
# Such forms with ''-jñ-'' are underlyingly ''-y-y-'' (e.g. ''jāy-y-es'' → ''jājñes'').


In addition to these, the other two indeclinable adjectives ''cami'' and ''lalla'' have only the analytic forms ''(yaivu en) nanū cami''/''lalla''.
===H-nouns - Hahą lā halenī===
 
{{col-begin}}
==Verbs - Daradhūvī==
{{col-break}}
The Chlouvānem verb (''daradhūs'', pl. ''daradhūvī'') is the most inflected part of speech; its most basic forms are fusional, but many more specific formations are more agglutinative due to their origin from old Proto-Lahob particles or participles.
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
 
|+1-h (-a, -ā, (-ah, -āh), -o<sup>1</sup>)
The first and most important division we can find in Chlouvānem verbs is the distinction between '''exterior '''(''kauyāva'') and '''interior''' (''nañyāva'') verbs. This may at first seem a voice system, but it must be distinguished from the true voices in Chlouvānem conjugation. The difference between them is mostly lexical: native grammarians distinguish exterior verbs as describing "activities or states that involve interactions with outside the self", and interior verbs as affecting principally the self. Exterior verbs are those we could most easily compare to active verbs in English, while interior verbs are a somewhat "catch-all" category including many distinct meanings, most notably middle-voice, reflexive and reciprocal ones, but also all adjectival verbs as well as peculiar and somewhat independent meanings for some verbs. Many verbs can be conjugated both as exterior and as interior and they often have differences in meaning - e.g. ''gṇyauke ''means “to give birth” when exterior and “to be born” when interior.
|-
 
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
Potentially every Chlouvānem verb, no matter if exterior or interior, has a '''causative''' conjugation which is considered an inflection and not a derivation, even if the meanings may vary: ''mišake'' is an extreme example as each form has a different meaning (with particularly interior forms having many meanings) - non-causative exterior ''mešu'' "I am seen", interior ''meširu'' "I know; I see myself"; and causative exterior ''maišaxhām'' "I am shown", interior ''maiširxhām'' "I learn; I show myself <small>(trans.)</small>".
 
Chlouvānem verbs also conjugate for seven '''voices''', each one putting one of seven different core elements as the ''direct-case argument'', usually for means of topicalization or definiteness; they reflect the Austronesian-type morphosyntactical alignment of the language. The seven voices are, for exterior verbs:
* '''patient-trigger '''or ''patientive ''(unmarked);
* '''agent-trigger '''or ''agentive'' (transitive and ditransitive verbs only);
* '''benefactive-trigger '''or simply ''benefactive'';
* '''antibenefactive-trigger '''or simply ''antibenefactive'';
* '''locative-trigger '''or simply ''locative'';
* '''dative-trigger''' or simply ''dative'' (mostly ditransitive verbs);
* '''instrumental-trigger''' or simply ''instrumental'' (morphologically possible for all verbs, but not always meaningful).
Interior verbs only have six voices, as they do not have an agentive voice; the patientive, unmarked voice, is here called '''common voice'''.
 
Chlouvānem verbs also conjugate for four different '''tense-aspect combinations''' (simply ''tenses''): the '''present''' and '''future''', both imperfective, and '''past''' and '''perfect''', both perfective; other distinctions may be built periphrastically (most notably ''imperfect'', ''pluperfect'' and ''future perfect''). Tenses are the “basic unit” verbs conjugate in: all tenses conjugate for nine persons (1st-2nd-3rd in singular, dual and plural; note though that 3rd singular and 3rd plural are identical in the perfect). Note that some moods do only distinguish between imperfective and perfective aspect.
 
Some pronouns [[Chlouvānem#Personal pronouns|have a clitic form]] in accusative and ergative case which may be added to specify other arguments - e.g. ''mešėça'' "he sees" + ''-æl'' (clitic 1sg acc.) > ''mešėçæl'' "he sees me" - equivalent to ''læl mešėça''.
 
However, the most complex part of Chlouvānem verbs is the '''mood'''. Chlouvānem is particularly mood-heavy and its concept of mood is quite broad, conjugating verbs in what are called '''primary moods '''and '''secondary moods'''; a single verb form may have a single primary mood but up to two secondary moods. 
 
The ten primary moods are:
* '''indicative''' - the realis mood;
* '''imperative''' - used for giving orders or commands;
* '''desiderative''' - used to express a desire or will (e.g. I want to X);
* '''necessitative''' - used to express need or obligation (e.g. I have to X);
* '''potential''' - used to express the ability to do something (e.g. I can [= am able to] X)
* '''permissive''' - used to express the permission to do something (e.g. I can [= I’m allowed to] X)
* '''optative '''- used to express wishes or hopes;
* '''propositive '''- used to express proposals (e.g. let’s X; why don’t you X);
* '''hypothetical '''- used to express things that may happen or might have happened;
* '''subjunctive '''- used to express general advices (jussive use), purpose (supine use), and also syntactically conditioned by some particles.
The seven secondary moods are:
* five of them express '''evidentiality''', namely: certainty (also '''energetic mood'''), deduction, dream, specifically invented situation, and hearsay (also '''inferential mood''');
* two '''consequential moods''': one expressing ''cause'' (e.g. “because X”), the other ''opposition'' (e.g. “although X”).
Chlouvānem verbs also have a '''non-finite form '''(the '''-ke''' form, called '''infinitive''' hereafter) as well as a large number of '''attributive''' and '''adverbial participles''', with forms for most voices and tenses and a distinction into '''modal adverbs''', '''homofocal gerundives''' and '''heterofocal gerundives'''.
 
===Verb classes and infinitive===
Verbs, in Chlouvānem, are conjugated depending on ''verb classes'' or ''conjugations''. There are four main patterns:
* '''a-root''', or '''thematic''': the most basic and regular, formed by adding '''a''' to the root before non-vocalic endings.
* '''Athematic''': as above, without '''a'''; endings are added directly to the root.
* '''Ablauting root''': formed by the root with ablaut changes in its main vowel, plus '''a''' before non-vocalic endings.
** '''Athematic ablauting root''': a small subset conjugating as above, but without '''a'''.
* '''ah verbs''': verbs which add '''-ah''' (or its allomorphs '''-ar''', '''-aš''', '''-ą''') to the root.
 
A fifth commonly recognized pattern is '''ru verbs'''. These are verbs formed by borrowed verb roots from Ancient Kūṣṛmāthi (where verbal nouns end in ''-ru'') and in the present and past undergo stem modifications like in that language. There are few common -ru verbs, and in usual speech they are often substituted by compounds with their root and either ''dṛke'' (to do, make) or ''jānake'' (to feel (physical)), or ''gyake'' (to be), and more rarely ''jåliake'' (to do, carry out an action), as in ''pāṭṭaruke'' vs. ''pāṭṭarudṛke'' (and also vs. the rarer ''pāṭṭarujåliake'') (to study).
 
Moods apart from the indicative mainly just follow root structure, with different allomorphs depending on whether the root ends in a consonant or in a vowel.
 
There are, in addition to these, a few particular verb types with either some kind of suffix added to the root in some forms, or irregular ablaut, or totally irregular (usually suppletive). The majority of verbs, anyway, is either ''thematic'' or ''thematic ablauting'', and the majority of roots end in one or two consonants.
 
The '''infinitive''' or ''ke-form'' is a non-finite form used in certain construction (like with certain verbs (e.g. ''daudike'' (to want)) or particles). It is also the citation form, and it is simple to recognize and form:
* The infinitive is always based on the root, thus with either a basic-grade vowel for ablauting verbs or an unreduced sequence for inverse-ablauting ones.
* Verbs in the ''thematic'' or ''ablauting root'' classes add '''-ake''';
* All other verbs just add '''-ke'''. There are a few cases where this is not always how it surfaces:
** verbs ending in a palatalized consonant have an epenthetic ''-i-'' (e.g. ''męlь-ke'' → ''męlike'' (to give));
** verbs whose roots end in any single or postnasal unvoiced dental, retroflex, or palatal stop or affricate, assimilate the ''-k-'' of the suffix (e.g. ''kit-ke'' → ''kitte'' (to put, place));
** verbs whose roots end in any single or postnasal voiced, non-velar stop, assimilate the voicing of the suffix ''-k-'' (e.g. ''dįb-ke'' → ''dįbge'' (to kick));
** verbs whose roots end in single ''-g'' or ''-gh'' assimilate the ''-k-'', with the regular saṃdhi change from double voiced stop to nasal + voiced stop (e.g. ''dig-ke'' → ''dilge'' (to pour));
*** This also happens with the cluster ''-nd'', where the assimilation ''-nd-k'' makes it ''-lg'' (e.g. ''mind-ke'' → ''milge'' (to hear));
** verbs whose roots end in any other consonant cluster only add ''-e'' (e.g. ''pugl-ke'' → ''pugle'' (to sleep)).
 
===Present indicative===
The regular present indicative has a distinct form for all verb types.<br/>Ablauting verbs have ''middle grade'' ablaut in all exterior forms and in the singular interior ones. ru verbs change ''-ru'' with ''-su''.<br/>
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 colspan=2 | Person !! colspan =2 | a-root !! colspan =2 | Athematic !! colspan =2 | Ablaut !! colspan =2 | -ah- !! colspan =2 | -ru-
! <small>Direct</small>
| '''māra'''<br/><small>''"mango"''</small> || rowspan=2 | mārāt || rowspan=2 | mārai
|-
|-
! colspan=2 | nāmvake <br/><small>"to crush, press"</small> !! colspan=2 | gṇyauke <br/><small>"to give birth; ''int.:'' to be born"</small> !! colspan=2 | mišake <br/><small>"to see"</small> !! lilke <br/><small>"to live"</small> !! hañilke <br/><small>"to remember"</small> !! pāṭṭaruke <br/><small>"to study"</small> !! kūmeruke <br/><small>"to be embarassed"</small>
! <small>Vocative</small>
| māre
|-
|-
! <small>Exterior</small> !! <small>Interior</small> !! <small>Exterior</small> !! <small>Interior</small> !! <small>Exterior</small> !! <small>Interior</small> !! <small>Exterior</small> !! <small>Interior</small> !! <small>Exterior</small> !! <small>Interior</small>
! <small>Accusative</small>
| māru || mārāṣa || māraih
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Sing. !! 1st
! <small>Ergative</small>
| nāmv'''u''' || nāmv'''iru''' || gṇyāv'''u''' || gṇyāv'''iru''' || meš'''u''' || meš'''iru''' || lil'''ah''' || hañil'''ąiru''' || pāṭṭa'''sū''' || kume'''suiru'''
| mārei || mārāra || mārān
|-
|-
! 2nd
! <small>Genitive</small>
| nāmv'''i''' || nāmv'''iris''' || gṇyāv'''i''' || gṇyāv'''iris''' || meš'''i''' || meš'''iris''' || lil'''aši''' || hañil'''ąiris''' || pāṭṭa'''sui''' || kume'''suiris'''
| māri<sup>2</sup> || māreva || mārumi
|-
|-
! 3rd
! <small>Translative</small>
| nāmv'''ė''' || nāmv'''ire''' || gṇyāv'''ė''' || gṇyāv'''ire''' || meš'''ė''' || meš'''ire''' || lil'''ah''' || hañil'''ąire''' || pāṭṭa'''suvė''' || kume'''suire'''
| māran || mārarį || māremān
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Dual !! 1st
! <small>Exessive</small>
| nāmv'''odām''' || nāmv'''irdām''' || gṇyau'''dām''' || gṇyāv'''irdām''' || meš'''odām''' || miš'''irdām''' || lil'''ardām''' || hañil'''ęrdām''' || pāṭṭa'''sudām''' || kume'''suirdām'''
| mārat || mārabhan || mārenīs
|-
|-
! 2nd
! <small>Essive</small>
| nāmv'''odās''' || nāmv'''irdās''' || gṇyau'''dās''' || gṇyāv'''irdās''' || meš'''odās''' || miš'''irdās''' || lil'''ardās''' || hañil'''ęrdās''' || pāṭṭa'''sudās''' || kume'''suirdās'''
| māręs || māranne || mārāra
|-
|-
! 3rd
! <small>Dative</small>
| nāmv'''odāvo''' || nāmv'''irdāvo''' || gṇyau'''dāvo''' || gṇyāv'''irdāvo''' || meš'''odāvo''' || miš'''irdāvo''' || lil'''ardāvo''' || hañil'''ęrdāvo''' || pāṭṭa'''sudāvo''' || kume'''suirdāvo'''
| mārom || mārarį || māresām
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Pl. !! 1st
! <small>Ablative</small>
| nāmv'''amui''' || nāmv'''irmui''' || gṇyau'''mui''' || gṇyāv'''irmui''' || meš'''amui''' || miš'''irmui''' || lil'''ąmui''' || hañil'''ęrmui''' || pāṭṭa'''sumui''' || kume'''suirmui'''
| mārų || mārabhan || mārenīs
|-
|-
! 2nd
! <small>Locative</small>
| nāmv'''akui''' || nāmv'''irkui''' || gṇyau'''kui''' || gṇyāv'''irkui''' || meš'''akui''' || miš'''irkui''' || lil'''ąkui''' || hañil'''ęrkui''' || pāṭṭa'''sukui''' || kume'''suirkui'''
| māre || māranne || mārelīm
|-
|-
! 3rd
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| nāmv'''ęn''' || nāmv'''iręn''' || gṇyāv'''ęn''' || gṇyāv'''iręn''' || meš'''ęn''' || miš'''iręn''' || lil'''ah''' || hañil'''ęręn''' || pāṭṭa'''suvęn''' || kume'''suiręn'''
| mārap || mārabhan || mārenīka
|}
|}
 
{{col-break}}
'''Causative'''<br/>
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
Causative forms are the same regardless of conjugation; they are formed basically with an extended stem with ''-(a)xh-''. Ablauting verbs always have the highest grade vowel, while inverse ablaut verbs have the "lowered" vowel in front of the normal stem.<br/>
|+2-h (-ē, -eh, -ǣh<sup>3</sup>)
All causative verbs have both exterior and interior forms.
|-
 
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 colspan=2 | Person !! colspan =2 | No ablaut !! colspan =2 | Ablaut !! colspan =2 | Inverse ablaut
! <small>Direct</small>
| '''javileh'''<br/><small>''"apple"''</small> || rowspan=2 | javilyāt || rowspan=2 | javilyai
|-
|-
! colspan=2 | nāmvake <br/><small>"to make crush, press"</small> !! colspan=2 | mišake <br/><small>"to show; ''int.:'' learn"</small> !! colspan=2 | valde <br/><small>"to make open"</small>
! <small>Vocative</small>
| javilei
|-
|-
! <small>Exterior</small> !! <small>Interior</small> !! <small>Exterior</small> !! <small>Interior</small> !! <small>Exterior</small> !! <small>Interior</small>
! <small>Accusative</small>
| javilyu || javilēṣa || javileih
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Sing. !! 1st
! <small>Ergative</small>
| nāmv'''axhām''' || nāmv'''irxhām''' || maiš'''axhām''' || maiš'''irxhām''' || uvald'''axhām''' || uvald'''irxhām'''
| javilei || javilyāra || javilyān
|-
|-
! 2nd
! <small>Genitive</small>
| nāmv'''axhie''' || nāmv'''irxhie''' || maiš'''axhie''' || maiš'''irxhie''' || uvald'''axhie''' || uvald'''irxhie'''
| javili || javileva<sup>4</sup> || javilyumi
|-
|-
! 3rd
! <small>Translative</small>
| nāmv'''axhā''' || nāmv'''irxhā''' || maiš'''axhā''' || maiš'''irxhā''' || uvald'''axhā''' || uvald'''irxhā'''
| javilen || javilerį || javilemān
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Dual !! 1st
! <small>Exessive</small>
| nāmv'''anxhām''' || nāmv'''irenxhām''' || maiš'''anxhām''' || maiš'''irenxhām''' || uvald'''anxhām''' || uvald'''irenxhām'''
| javilet || javilebhan || javilenīs
|-
|-
! 2nd
! <small>Essive</small>
| nāmv'''anxhās''' || nāmv'''irenxhās''' || maiš'''anxhās''' || maiš'''irenxhās''' || uvald'''anxhās''' || uvald'''irenxhās'''
| javilęs || javilenne || javilyāra
|-
|-
! 3rd
! <small>Dative</small>
| nāmv'''anxhū''' || nāmv'''irenxhū''' || maiš'''anxhū''' || maiš'''irenxhū''' || uvald'''anxhū''' || uvald'''irenxhū'''
| javilyom || javilerį || javilesām
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Pl. !! 1st
! <small>Ablative</small>
| nāmv'''axhumi''' || nāmv'''irxhumi''' || maiš'''axhumi''' || maiš'''irxhumi''' || uvald'''axhumi''' || uvald'''irxhumi'''
| javilyų || javilebhan || javilenīs
|-
|-
! 2nd
! <small>Locative</small>
| nāmv'''axhuši''' || nāmv'''irxhuši''' || maiš'''axhuši''' || maiš'''irxhuši''' || uvald'''axhuši''' || uvald'''irxhuši'''
| javilye || javilenne || javilelīm
|-
|-
! 3rd
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| nāmv'''axhįs''' || nāmv'''irxhįs''' || maiš'''axhįs''' || maiš'''irxhįs''' || uvald'''axhįs''' || uvald'''irxhįs'''
| javilep || javilebhan || javilenīka
|}
|}
 
{{col-break}}
===Imperative===
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
The imperative is a defective paradigm, lacking all dual forms; it is formed from the bare root, so it is formed in the same way for all verbs. Unlike all other terminations, there are separate agentive and patientive ones (note that agentive ones begin with '''-ь''' and not ''-y''. Causative forms follow the same pattern as non-causative ones, but the stem is the specifically causative one.
|+3-h (-uh, -ūh, -u<sup>5</sup>)
 
|-
Note that, due to the politeness system of Chlouvānem, the imperative is somewhat rare, as other methods are used. The first person imperative is an exception, being often used with the meaning “I/we must”.
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
 
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 colspan=2 | Person !! colspan=3 | Non-causative !! colspan=3 | Causative
! <small>Direct</small>
| '''ñaɂuh'''<br/><small>''"fruit skin"''</small> || rowspan=2 | ñaɂūt || rowspan=2 | ñaɂūvi
|-
|-
! colspan=6 | nāmvake <br/><small>"to crush, press"</small>
! <small>Vocative</small>
| ñaɂū
|-
|-
! <small>Ex. patientive</small> !! <small>Ex. agentive</small> !! <small>Interior</small> !! <small>Ex. patientive</small> !! <small>Ex. agentive</small> !! <small>Interior</small>
! <small>Accusative</small>
| ñaɂunu || ñaɂūṣa || ñaɂuyih
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Sing. !! 1st
! <small>Ergative</small>
| nāmv'''ikṣam''' || nāmv'''yasti''' || nāmv'''irkam''' || nāmv'''axhiṣam''' || nāmv'''axhisti''' || nāmv'''axhirkam'''
| ñaɂuyei || ñaɂura || ñaɂun
|-
|-
! 2nd
! <small>Genitive</small>
| nāmv'''eik''' || nāmv'''a''' || nāmv'''ih''' || nāmv'''axheik''' || nāmv'''axhia''' || nāmv'''axhih'''
| ñaɂuyi || ñaɂuva || ñaɂūmi
|-
|-
! 3rd
! <small>Translative</small>
| nāmv'''eitte''' || nāmv'''ya''' || nāmv'''irda''' || nāmv'''axhiṣai''' || nāmv'''axhit''' || nāmv'''axhirda'''
| ñaɂun || ñaɂurį || ñaɂumān
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Dual !! 1st
! <small>Exessive</small>
| rowspan=3 colspan=6 style="text-align: center;" | ''No dual imperative forms''
| ñaɂut || ñaɂubhan || ñaɂunīs
|-
|-
! 2nd
! <small>Essive</small>
| ñaɂųs || ñaɂunne || ñaɂura
|-
|-
! 3rd
! <small>Dative</small>
| ñaɂuvom || ñaɂurį || ñaɂusām
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Pl. !! 1st
! <small>Ablative</small>
| nāmv'''ikṣumi''' || nāmv'''yasmi''' || nāmv'''irkumi''' || nāmv'''axhiṣmi''' || nāmv'''axhismi''' || nāmv'''axhiurum'''
| ñaɂuvų || ñaɂubhan || ñaɂunīs
|-
|-
! 2nd
! <small>Locative</small>
| nāmv'''eikus''' || nāmv'''yęs''' || nāmv'''irkus''' || nāmv'''axhiṣus''' || nāmv'''axhięs''' || nāmv'''axhiurus'''
| ñaɂuve || ñaɂunne || ñaɂulīm
|-
|-
! 3rd
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| nāmv'''eicąt''' || nāmv'''yęt''' || nāmv'''ircąt''' || nāmv'''axhiṣat''' || nāmv'''axhięt''' || nāmv'''axhiurat'''
| ñaɂup || ñaɂubhan || ñaɂunīka
|}
|}
 
{{col-break}}
Note that the second person singular agentive non-causative form does not take '''-a''' if the ending of the root is already acceptable (e.g. ''lgut!'' "buy!"). If the root ends with a palatalized consonant, it remains as such if it ends with a single acceptable consonant (e.g. ''męlь!'' "give!), otherwise it adds ''-i'' (e.g. ''dhāsmi!'' "save!").
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
 
|+4-m (-ih, -īh, -i<sup>6</sup>)
===Past Indicative===
|-
In the past indicative, -ah verbs are not distinguished as a conjugation, behaving instead like root verbs. Frequentative verbs in ''-ve(y)-'' are completely regular, but the suffix becomes ''-vi(y)-'', e.g. ''mīmīšviyitь'' "it was frequently seen" vs. present ''mīmīšveyė'' "it is frequently seen".<br/>
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
Ablauting verbs always have their base grade, except for inverse ablaut roots which use the reduced vowel, and plural interior forms.
Exterior forms:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 colspan=2 | Person !! colspan =2 | a-root !! colspan =2 | Athematic !! colspan =2 | Ablaut
! <small>Direct</small>
| '''ghārṭih'''<br/><small>''"arrow"''</small> || rowspan=2 | ghārṭīt || rowspan=2 | ghārṭeyi
|-
|-
! colspan=2 | nāmvake <br/><small>"to crush, press"</small> !! colspan=2 | gṇyauke <br/><small>"to give birth; ''int.:'' to be born"</small> !! colspan=2 | mišake <br/><small>"to see"</small>
! <small>Vocative</small>
| ghārṭī
|-
|-
! <small>Exterior</small> !! <small>Interior</small> !! <small>Exterior</small> !! <small>Interior</small> !! <small>Exterior</small> !! <small>Interior</small>
! <small>Accusative</small>
| ghārṭyu || ghārṭīṣa || ghārṭeyih
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Sing. !! 1st
! <small>Ergative</small>
| nāmv'''au''' || nāmv'''irau''' || gṇyāv'''au''' || gṇyāv'''iru''' || miš'''au''' || miš'''irau'''
| ghārṭyei || ghārṭira || ghārṭin
|-
|-
! 2nd
! <small>Genitive</small>
| nāmv'''ei''' || nāmv'''irei''' || gṇyāv'''ei''' || gṇyāv'''irei''' || miš'''ei''' || miš'''irei'''
| ghārṭīyi || ghārṭiva || ghārṭyumi
|-
|-
! 3rd
! <small>Translative</small>
| nāmv'''itь''' || nāmv'''iritь''' || gṇyāv'''itь''' || gṇyāv'''iritь''' || miš'''itь''' || miš'''iritь'''
| ghārṭin || ghārṭirį || ghārṭimān
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Dual !! 1st
! <small>Exessive</small>
| nāmv'''ādram''' || nāmv'''eldram''' || gṇyāv'''ādram''' || gṇyāv'''eldram''' || miš'''ādram''' || miš'''eldram'''
| ghārṭit || ghārṭibhan || ghārṭinīs
|-
|-
! 2nd
! <small>Essive</small>
| nāmv'''ādras''' || nāmv'''eldras''' || gṇyāv'''ādras''' || gṇyāv'''eldras''' || miš'''ādras''' || miš'''eldras'''
| ghārṭįs || ghārṭinne || ghārṭira
|-
|-
! 3rd
! <small>Dative</small>
| nāmv'''ādru''' || nāmv'''eldru''' || gṇyāv'''ādru''' || gṇyāv'''eldru''' || miš'''ādru''' || miš'''eldru'''
| ghārṭyom || ghārṭirį || ghārṭisām
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Pl. !! 1st
! <small>Ablative</small>
| nāmv'''ānajam''' || nāmv'''īrajam''' || gṇyāv'''ānajam''' || gṇyāv'''īrajam''' || miš'''ānajam''' || miš'''īrajam'''
| ghārṭyų || ghārṭibhan || ghārṭinīs
|-
|-
! 2nd
! <small>Locative</small>
| nāmv'''ogan''' || nāmv'''iroge''' || gṇyāv'''ogan''' || gṇyāv'''iroge''' || miš'''ogan''' || miš'''iroge'''
| ghārṭye || ghārṭinne || ghārṭilīm
|-
|-
! 3rd
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| nāmv'''āyona''' || nāmv'''īrona''' || gṇyāv'''āyona''' || gṇyāv'''īrona''' || miš'''āyona''' || miš'''īrona'''
| ghārṭip || ghārṭibhan || ghārṭinīka
|}
|}
 
{{col-end}}
'''Causative'''<br/>
{{col-begin}}
Causative forms use the same stems as in the present indicative.
{{col-break}}
Exterior forms:
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
{| class="wikitable"
|+1-h (h-paradigm)
|-
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 colspan=2 | Person !! colspan =2 | No ablaut !! colspan =2 | Ablaut !! colspan =2 | Inverse ablaut
! <small>Direct</small>
| '''raiṇah'''<br/><small>''"(piece of) cloth"''</small> || rowspan=2 | raiṇāt || rowspan=2 | raiṇai
|-
|-
! colspan=2 | nāmvake <br/><small>"to make crush, press"</small> !! colspan=2 | mišake <br/><small>"to show; ''int.:'' learn"</small> !! colspan=2 | valde <br/><small>"to make open"</small>
! <small>Vocative</small>
| raiṇe
|-
|-
! <small>Exterior</small> !! <small>Interior</small> !! <small>Exterior</small> !! <small>Interior</small> !! <small>Exterior</small> !! <small>Interior</small>
! <small>Accusative</small>
| raiṇu || raiṇāṣa || raiṇaih
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Sing. !! 1st
! <small>Ergative</small>
| nāmv'''axhiou''' || nāmv'''irxhiou''' || maiš'''axhiou''' || maiš'''irxhiou''' || uvald'''axhiou''' || uvald'''irxhiou'''
| raiṇei || raiṇāra || raiṇān
|-
|-
! 2nd
! <small>Genitive</small>
| nāmv'''axhei''' || nāmv'''irxhei''' || maiš'''axhei''' || maiš'''irxhei''' || uvald'''axhei''' || uvald'''irxhei'''
| raiṇi<sup>2</sup> || raiṇeva || raiṇumi
|-
|-
! 3rd
! <small>Translative</small>
| nāmv'''axhitь''' || nāmv'''irxhitь''' || maiš'''axhitь''' || maiš'''irxhitь''' || uvald'''axhitь''' || uvald'''irxhitь'''
| raiṇan || raiṇarį || raiṇamān
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Dual !! 1st
! <small>Exessive</small>
| nāmv'''axhādram''' || nāmv'''irxhādram''' || maiš'''axhādram''' || maiš'''irxhādram''' || uvald'''axhādram''' || uvald'''irxhādram'''
| raiṇat || raiṇabhan || raiṇenīs
|-
|-
! 2nd
! <small>Essive</small>
| nāmv'''axhādras''' || nāmv'''irxhādras''' || maiš'''axhādras''' || maiš'''irxhādras''' || uvald'''axhādras''' || uvald'''irxhādras'''
| raiṇęs || raiṇanne || raiṇāra
|-
|-
! 3rd
! <small>Dative</small>
| nāmv'''axhādru''' || nāmv'''irxhādru''' || maiš'''axhādru''' || maiš'''irxhādru''' || uvald'''axhādru''' || uvald'''irxhādru'''
| raiṇom || raiṇarį || raiṇasām
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Pl. !! 1st
! <small>Ablative</small>
| nāmv'''axhāñjam''' || nāmv'''irxhāñjam''' || maiš'''axhāñjam''' || maiš'''irxhāñjam''' || uvald'''axhāñjam''' || meš'''irxhāñjam'''
| raiṇų || raiṇabhan || raiṇanīs
|-
|-
! 2nd
! <small>Locative</small>
| nāmv'''axhogan''' || nāmv'''irxhogan''' || maiš'''axhogan''' || maiš'''irxhogan''' || uvald'''axhogan''' || uvald'''irxhogan'''
| raiṇe || raiṇanne || raiṇalīm
|-
|-
! 3rd
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| nāmv'''axhaina''' || nāmv'''irxhaina''' || maiš'''axhaina''' || maiš'''irxhaina''' || uvald'''axhaina''' || uvald'''irxhaina'''
| raiṇap || raiṇabhan || raiṇanīka
|}
|}
{{col-break|valign=middle|gap=1em}}
The ''h-paradigm'' used by nouns in ''-ah'' and ''-āh'' is substantially identical to the regular 1-h one, except for the exessive, dative, ablative, locative, and instrumental plural which have ''-a-'' instead of ''-e-'' as a linking vowel and, for some nouns, the genitive singular ''(see table note 2)''.
{{col-end}}
Table notes:
# ''-o'' nouns are mostly toponyms of Toyubeshian origins; they decline like ''-a'' nouns, with their ending being treated as *-a-u, with the -a part of the stem; e.g. ''Paramito'', locative ''Paramitai'' (underlying form Paramit-a-e).
# ''-ya'', and ''-yā'' nouns form the genitive singular in ''-ei'' (e.g. ''lalyā'' "night" → ''lalei''). Nouns in ''-yah'', and ''-yāh'', however, have the regular ending (e.g. ''yamyah'' "fog" → ''yamyi'').
# All ''-ǣh'' nouns are of Lällshag origin, and are mostly toponyms (like ''Laikunanǣh''), with some exceptions like the two lunar days ''kælyaunænǣh'' and ''yeicapænǣh''. Note that such nouns have their genitive singular in ''-ǣyi'' and not in ''-ī''.
# In older texts ''-eiva'' (e.g. ''javileiva''), today only used in literature for an archaïzing effect or to mark a character speaking with a Northern Plain pronunciation (where this form survives in the spoken language).
# Mostly regional Western words of Dabuke origin.
# Non-productive with borrowings, but common in native words.


===Perfect Indicative===
===Special declensions===
The perfect is formed with the same terminations for all verbs. The particularity of this tense is that it uses a special stem, formed by prefixing the root vowel (shortened, oral, and with the basic root ablaut) to the stem. Examples:
{{col-begin}}
* ''nāmvake'' “to crush, press” = ''nāmv- → anāmv-''
{{col-break}}
* ''khluke'' “to search, look for” = ''khlu- → ukhlu-''
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
* ''hilkake'' “to dye, colour” = ''hilk- → ihilk-''
|+Ablaut declension
* ''męlike'' “to give” = ''męlь → emęlь-''
'''æ''' uses '''i'''; '''o''' and '''ṛ''' use '''a'''; diphthongs usually only take their first component, exceptions being '''ai''' (→ e) and '''au''' (→ o):
* ''dældake'' “to speak” = ''dæld- → idæld-''
* ''kolkake'' “to be acid” = ''kolk- → akolk-''
* ''tṛlake'' “to know, understand” = ''tṛl- → atṛl-''
* ''yaudake'' “to catch” = ''yaud- → oyaud-''
* ''laitake'' “to row” = ''lait- → elait-''
 
Causative stems with ablaut have a full reduplication, using the first consonant plus the basic vowel grade, like ''miš- → maiš- → mimaiš-''.
 
A few verbs have irregular stems:
* ''lilke'' “to live” = ''lælī-''
* ''dṛke'' “to do” = ''dadrā-''
 
Note that in the perfect, 3rd person singular and plural are the same for all verbs:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! rowspan=3 colspan=2 | Person !! colspan=2 | Non-causative !! colspan=2 | Causative
|-
! colspan=4 | nāmvake <br/><small>"to crush, press"</small>
|-
|-
! <small>Exterior</small> !! <small>Interior</small> !! <small>Exterior</small> !! <small>Interior</small>
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Sing. !! 1st
! <small>Direct</small>
| anāmv'''am''' || anāmv'''iram''' || anāmv'''ixam''' || anāmv'''erxam'''
| rowspan=2 | '''lila'''<br/><small>''"person"''</small> || rowspan=2 | lilāt || rowspan=2 | lelyē
|-
|-
! 2nd
! <small>Vocative</small>
| anāmv'''es''' || anāmv'''ires''' || anāmv'''ixes''' || anāmv'''erxes'''
|-
|-
! 3rd
! <small>Accusative</small>
| anāmv'''a''' || anāmv'''irā''' || anāmv'''ixa''' || anāmv'''erxa'''
| lilu || lilāṣa || lelyu
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Dual !! 1st
! <small>Ergative</small>
| anāmv'''onda''' || anāmv'''irunda''' || anāmv'''ixunda''' || anāmv'''erxunda'''
| lilei || lilāra || lelyei
|-
|-
! 2nd
! <small>Genitive</small>
| anāmv'''odes''' || anāmv'''irudes''' || anāmv'''ixudes''' || anāmv'''erxudes'''
| leli || lileva || laili
|-
|-
! 3rd
! <small>Translative</small>
| anāmv'''ot''' || anāmv'''irut''' || anāmv'''ixut''' || anāmv'''erxut'''
| lilan || lilarį || lelyan
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Pl. !! 1st
! <small>Exessive</small>
| anāmv'''amia''' || anāmv'''iramia''' || anāmv'''ixmia''' || anāmv'''erxmia'''
| lilat || lilabhan || lelyat
|-
|-
! 2nd
! <small>Essive</small>
| anāmv'''asia''' || anāmv'''irasia''' || anāmv'''inxia''' || anāmv'''erinxia'''
| liląs || lilanne || lailąs
|-
|-
! 3rd
! <small>Dative</small>
| anāmv'''a''' || anāmv'''irā''' || anāmv'''ixa''' || anāmv'''erxa'''
| lilom || lilarį || lelyom
|}
 
=== Future indicative ===
The future tense does not vary between conjugations, and the stem - except for causative verbs - is always the one used in the infinitive.
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 colspan=2 | Person !! colspan=2 | Non-causative !! colspan=2 | Causative
! <small>Ablative</small>
| lilų || lilabhan || lelyų
|-
|-
! colspan=4 | nāmvake <br/><small>"to crush, press"</small>
! <small>Locative</small>
| lile || lilanne || laile
|-
|-
! <small>Exterior</small> !! <small>Interior</small> !! <small>Exterior</small> !! <small>Interior</small>
! <small>Instrumental</small>
|-
| lilap || lilabhan || lelyap
! rowspan=3 | Sing. !! 1st
| nāmv'''iṣyam''' || nāmv'''eriṣyam''' || nāmv'''axhiṣyam''' || nāmv'''irxhiṣyam'''
|-
! 2nd
| nāmv'''iṣyes''' || nāmv'''eriṣyes''' || nāmv'''axhiṣyes''' || nāmv'''irxhiṣyes'''
|-
! 3rd
| nāmv'''iṣya''' || nāmv'''eriṣya''' || nāmv'''axhiṣya''' || nāmv'''irxhiṣya'''
|-
! rowspan=3 | Dual !! 1st
| nāmv'''iṣṭām''' || nāmv'''eriṣṭām''' || nāmv'''axhiṣṭām''' || nāmv'''irxhiṣṭām'''
|-
! 2nd
| nāmv'''iṣṭās''' || nāmv'''eriṣṭās''' || nāmv'''axhiṣṭās''' || nāmv'''irxhiṣṭās'''
|-
! 3rd
| nāmv'''iṣṭāvo''' || nāmv'''eriṣṭāvo''' || nāmv'''axhiṣṭāvo''' || nāmv'''irxhiṣṭāvo'''
|-
! rowspan=3 | Pl. !! 1st
| nāmv'''iṣmāmi''' || nāmv'''eriṣmāmi''' || nāmv'''axhiṣmāmi''' || nāmv'''irxhiṣmāmi'''
|-
! 2nd
| nāmv'''iṣmāsi''' || nāmv'''eriṣmāsi''' || nāmv'''axhiṣmāsi''' || nāmv'''irxhiṣmāsi'''
|-
! 3rd
| nāmv'''iṣmāta''' || nāmv'''eriṣmāta''' || nāmv'''axhiṣmāta''' || nāmv'''irxhiṣmāta'''
|}
|}
 
{{col-break}}
=== Voice marking ===
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
Chlouvānem has seven voices, marked by affixes added, in unprefixed verbs, at the end of the verb. As the patient-trigger voice (common voice in interior verbs) is unmarked, the six voice markers are:
|+-oe declension
* '''-ça''' for agent-trigger voice (in exterior verbs only);
* '''-kæ''' for benefactive-trigger voice;
* '''-tū''' ('''-tur''' non-finally) for antibenefactive-trigger voice;
* '''-pan''' for locative-trigger voice;
* '''-mea''' for instrumental-trigger voice;
* '''-ūsi''' for dative-trigger voice.
Examples of voice marking are ''męliė'' (he/she/it is given) — ''męliėça'' (he/she/it gives) — ''męliėkæ'' (something is given for him/her/it) — ''męliėtū'' (something is given against him/her/it) — ''męliėpan'' (something is given in him/her/it) — ''męliėmea'' (something is given with him/her/it) — ''męliegūsi'' (something is given to him/her/it).
 
In prefixed verbs, voice marking is a bit different as the voice marker is inserted between the prefix and the stem, thus forms like ''vīvaiyųlė'' (he/she/it is eaten too much) → ''vīvaiçayųlė'' (he/she/it eats too much). Saṃdhi is applied if needed, e.g. "something is eaten for him/her/it directly from a tree" is ''taktæyųlė'' (morphemically ''tad-kæ-yųlė'', verb ''tadyųlake'').
 
===The subjunctive mood===
The subjunctive mood only distinguishes aspects and not tense; it is formed by special terminations and has exterior, interior, regular and causative forms.
 
The subjunctive is fairly regular for all verbs, using (except in the causative conjugation) the most basic form of the root — that is, without nā/nī suffixes and in basic grade ablaut; the only exceptions being inverse ablauting roots which use their weakened form (e.g. ''valde'' uses ''uld-'' and not ''vald-'').
A peculiarity of the subjunctive is that number is distinguished only in the first person: second person forms are the same for all numbers, as are third person ones.
 
'''Imperfective aspect'''
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! rowspan=3 colspan=2 | Person !! colspan=2 | Non-causative !! colspan=2 | Causative
|-
! colspan=4 | nāmvake <br/><small>"to crush, press"</small>
|-
! <small>Exterior</small> !! <small>Interior</small> !! <small>Exterior</small> !! <small>Interior</small>
|-
! rowspan=3 | Sing. !! 1st
| nāmv'''īn''' || nāmv'''irīn''' || nāmv'''ixhīn''' || nāmv'''irexhīn'''
|-
! 2nd
| nāmv'''ėši''' || nāmv'''irėši''' || nāmv'''ixhėši''' || nāmv'''irixhėši'''
|-
! 3rd
| nāmv'''ėti''' || nāmv'''irėti''' || nāmv'''ixhėti''' || nāmv'''irixhėti'''
|-
! rowspan=3 | Dual !! 1st
| nāmv'''ėjyam''' || nāmv'''irėjyam''' || nāmv'''ixhėjyam''' || nāmv'''irixhėjyam'''
|-
! 2nd
| nāmv'''ėši''' || nāmv'''irėši''' || nāmv'''ixhėši''' || nāmv'''irixhėši'''
|-
! 3rd
| nāmv'''ėti''' || nāmv'''irėti''' || nāmv'''ixhėti''' || nāmv'''irixhėti'''
|-
! rowspan=3 | Pl. !! 1st
| nāmv'''ėmiui''' || nāmv'''irėmiui''' || nāmv'''ixhėmiui''' || nāmv'''irixhėmiui'''
|-
|-
! 2nd
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
| nāmv'''ėši''' || nāmv'''irėši''' || nāmv'''ixhėši''' || nāmv'''irixhėši'''
|-
! 3rd
| nāmv'''ėti''' || nāmv'''irėti''' || nāmv'''ixhėti''' || nāmv'''irixhėti'''
|}
 
'''Perfective aspect'''
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 colspan=2 | Person !! colspan=2 | Non-causative !! colspan=2 | Causative
! <small>Direct</small>
| rowspan=2 | '''haloe'''<br/><small>''"name"''</small> || rowspan=2 | halenāt || rowspan=2 | halenī
|-
|-
! colspan=4 | nāmvake <br/><small>"to crush, press"</small>
! <small>Vocative</small>
|-
|-
! <small>Exterior</small> !! <small>Interior</small> !! <small>Exterior</small> !! <small>Interior</small>
! <small>Accusative</small>
| halenu || halenāṣa || halenaih
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Sing. !! 1st
! <small>Ergative</small>
| nāmv'''āyem''' || nāmv'''irāyem''' || nāmv'''ixhāyem''' || nāmv'''irixhāyem'''
| halenei || halenāya || halenān
|-
|-
! 2nd
! <small>Genitive</small>
| nāmv'''āyės''' || nāmv'''irāyės''' || nāmv'''ixhāyės''' || nāmv'''irixhāyės'''
| haleni || halemva || haloemi
|-
|-
! 3rd
! <small>Translative</small>
| nāmv'''āyė''' || nāmv'''irāyė''' || nāmv'''ixhāyė''' || nāmv'''irixhāyė'''
| halenan || halenaus || haloemān
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Dual !! 1st
! <small>Exessive</small>
| nāmv'''āyænda''' || nāmv'''irāyænda''' || nāmv'''ixhāyænda''' || nāmv'''irixhāyænda'''
| halenat || haloebhan || haloenīs
|-
|-
! 2nd
! <small>Essive</small>
| nāmv'''āyės''' || nāmv'''irāyės''' || nāmv'''ixhāyės''' || nāmv'''irixhāyės'''
| halen || haloegin || halenāya
|-
|-
! 3rd
! <small>Dative</small>
| nāmv'''āyė''' || nāmv'''irāyė''' || nāmv'''ixhāyė''' || nāmv'''irixhāyė'''
| halenom || halenaus || haloesām
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Pl. !! 1st
! <small>Ablative</small>
| nāmv'''āyėmia''' || nāmv'''irāyėmia''' || nāmv'''ixhāyėmia''' || nāmv'''irixhāyėmia'''
| halenų || haloebhan || haloenīs
|-
|-
! 2nd
! <small>Locative</small>
| nāmv'''āyės''' || nāmv'''irāyės''' || nāmv'''ixhāyės''' || nāmv'''irixhāyės'''
| halenye || haloegin || halenilīm
|-
|-
! 3rd
! <small>Instrumental</small>
| nāmv'''āyė''' || nāmv'''irāyė''' || nāmv'''ixhāyė''' || nāmv'''irixhāyė'''
| halenap || haloebhan || haloenīka
|}
|}
 
{{col-break}}
===The hypothetical mood===
{| class="redtable lightredbg" align="center" style="text-align: center;" |
The hypothetical mood is mainly used in ''if'' constructions (e.g. ''yųlatṛ'' "if it is eaten") and, like the subjunctive, only conjugates for aspect. As all terminations are vocalic, all conjugations form it the same way, starting from the root.
|+-ai declension
 
'''Imperfective aspect'''
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 colspan=2 | Person !! colspan=2 | Non-causative !! colspan=2 | Causative
! Case !! Singular !! Dual !! Plural
|-
|-
! colspan=4 | nāmvake <br/><small>"to crush, press"</small>
! <small>Direct</small>
| rowspan=2 | '''lunai'''<br/><small>''"tea"''</small> || rowspan=2 | lunaiva || rowspan=2 | lunāye
|-
|-
! <small>Exterior</small> !! <small>Interior</small> !! <small>Exterior</small> !! <small>Interior</small>
! <small>Vocative</small>
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Sing. !! 1st
! <small>Accusative</small>
| nāmv'''atiam''' || nāmv'''irtiam''' || nāmv'''axhitam''' || nāmv'''irxhitam'''
| lunāyu || lunāyes || lunāyaih
|-
|-
! 2nd
! <small>Ergative</small>
| nāmv'''atųs''' || nāmv'''irtųs''' || nāmv'''axhitųs''' || nāmv'''irxhitųs'''
| lunǣ || lunāyēn || lunāyūn
|-
|-
! 3rd
! <small>Genitive</small>
| nāmv'''atṛ''' || nāmv'''irtṛ''' || nāmv'''axhitṛ''' || nāmv'''irxhitṛ'''
| lunāyi || lunaiva || lunāyān
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Dual !! 1st
! <small>Translative</small>
| nāmv'''adītem''' || nāmv'''irdītem''' || nāmv'''axhidītem''' || nāmv'''irxhidītem'''
| lunain || lunāyį || lunaimān
|-
|-
! 2nd
! <small>Exessive</small>
| nāmv'''adītų''' || nāmv'''irdītų''' || nāmv'''axhidītų''' || nāmv'''irxhidītų'''
| lunait || lunaibhan || lunǣnīs
|-
|-
! 3rd
! <small>Essive</small>
| nāmv'''adītṛ''' || nāmv'''irdītṛ''' || nāmv'''axhidītṛ''' || nāmv'''irxhidītṛ'''
| lunąis || lunainne || lunāyēn
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Pl. !! 1st
! <small>Dative</small>
| nāmv'''acemi''' || nāmv'''irṣemi''' || nāmv'''axhicemi''' || nāmv'''irxhicemi'''
| lunāyom || lunāyį || lunaisām
|-
|-
! 2nd
! <small>Ablative</small>
| nāmv'''acųsi''' || nāmv'''irṣųsi''' || nāmv'''axhicųsi''' || nāmv'''irxhicųsi'''
| lunāyų || lunaibhan || lunǣnīs
|-
|-
! 3rd
! <small>Locative</small>
| nāmv'''ašri''' || nāmv'''ilšri''' || nāmv'''axhišri''' || nāmv'''irxhišri'''
| lunāye || lunainne || lunailīm
|}
'''Perfective aspect'''
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 colspan=2 | Person !! colspan=2 | Non-causative !! colspan=2 | Causative
! <small>Instrumental</small>
|-
| lunaip || lunaibhan || lunainīka
! colspan=4 | nāmvake <br/><small>"to crush, press"</small>
|-
! <small>Exterior</small> !! <small>Interior</small> !! <small>Exterior</small> !! <small>Interior</small>
|-
! rowspan=3 | Sing. !! 1st
| nāmv'''āttiam''' || nāmv'''eartiam''' || nāmv'''axhettiam''' || nāmv'''irxhettiam'''
|-
! 2nd
| nāmv'''āttųs''' || nāmv'''eartųs''' || nāmv'''axhettųs''' || nāmv'''irxhettųs'''
|-
! 3rd
| nāmv'''ātara''' || nāmv'''eartara''' || nāmv'''axhetara''' || nāmv'''irxhetara'''
|-
! rowspan=3 | Dual !! 1st
| nāmv'''āndītem''' || nāmv'''eardītem''' || nāmv'''axhendītem''' || nāmv'''irxhendītem'''
|-
! 2nd
| nāmv'''āndītų''' || nāmv'''eardītų''' || nāmv'''axhendītų''' || nāmv'''irxhendītų'''
|-
! 3rd
| nāmv'''āndītara''' || nāmv'''eardītara''' || nāmv'''axhendītara''' || nāmv'''irxhendītara'''
|-
! rowspan=3 | Pl. !! 1st
| nāmv'''ātecemi''' || nāmv'''earcemi''' || nāmv'''axheñcemi''' || nāmv'''irxheñcemi'''
|-
! 2nd
| nāmv'''ātecųsi''' || nāmv'''earcųsi''' || nāmv'''axheñcųsi''' || nāmv'''irxheñcųsi'''
|-
! 3rd
| nāmv'''ātešri''' || nāmv'''ealšri''' || nāmv'''axhetešri''' || nāmv'''irxhetešri'''
|}
|}
{{col-end}}
The ablaut declension is in the singular (except for the vocative and essive) and dual the same as the 1-h one, including the ''-ei'' rule for the genitive singular (e.g. ''rinya'' "ceiling", gen.sg. ''renei''), except for the fact that the genitive singular has a middle-grade vowel. The plural has mostly the same endings as the singular but with middle-grade vowels in most forms (genitive, essive, and locative have a higher-grade one). ''-y-'' is inserted between the stem and the ending, but not for nouns ending in ''-ya'' (''rinya'' → ''renyē'').<br/>
The vowel that undergoes ablaut is usually the penultimate (e.g. ''plušamila'' "Office of the Inquisition", plural ''plušamelyē''), but in some cases it's the first (e.g. ''kimeda'' (a type of panther), plural ''kemedyē'').


===The optative and propositive moods===
Hypocoristic forms of male names, which end in ''-em'' and are only used in the singular, are declined following a mix of the 1-m and 1-h patterns. In fact, they follow the 1-m pattern (the ''-am'' paradigm) except for the ergative (in ''-emei'' instead of *-(e)mæ) and the essive (in ''-ęs'' instead of *-(e)mą). For example the hypocoristicon ''Kælem'' has ergative ''Kælemei'' and essive ''Kælęs''.
Optative and propositive moods are made starting from the same stem; these stem use the same terminations as regular (a-type verbs) present for the imperfective aspect and regular past for the perfective; propositive mood uses the imperative ones.


The stem is formed by taking the root with vowel lengthening and adding '''-eina-''' after consonants ('''-ouna-''' after '''l''') and '''-vūna-''' after vowels. Note that, while adding terminations, a is deleted between a single sonorant and a single non-sonorant consonant (e.g. 1sg propositive causative ''-einxhiṣam'' < ''-ein-a-xhiṣam'')
===Singularia and pluralia tantum===
'''Pluralia tantum''' in Chlouvānem include the following words or categories of words:
# many collective nouns:

#: ''pārāk'' "hair", ''kāraṇḍhai'' "guts", ''yūgure'' "limbs", ''agṇyaucai'' "sons and daughters", ''vailašaus'' "cutlery", ''šūlyakāše'' "dishes"
# things that are heterogeneous in form but considered as a single entity:
#: ''katanai'' "clutter", ''dūḍhvai'' "banquet, buffet", ''vārṇaigīk'' (a type of sandals made from straw rope), ''ḍheṃlatiryai'' "streaming"<ref>The word ''latiryai'' is the plural of ''latirē'' (wave, ray), but this compound does not have a singular form.</ref>, ''ltælime'' "magic", ''ṣrūḍhais'' "savings", ''dāyārṣe'' "resin", ''ḍåtvāk'' "fat", ''tadmāltsāk'' "controller"
# certain actions and processes that involve multiple people:
#: ''vāgdilanai'' "elections", ''viṣlonai'' "protest, riot", ''jāṃrice'' "traffic jam", ''grembātatālunai'' "hide-and-seek" (sometimes also found as dual)
# nouns denoting certain time spans, festivals, or holidays:
#: ''saṃlallai'' "afternoon", ''Bhaivyāvāṣaryai'' (the most important Yunyalīlti festivity), ''Kūlħanarai'' (a winter festival of Kenengyry origin)
# a few illnesses and health conditions or disorders:
#: ''nirganai'' "urticaria", ''nañvai'' "autism", ''paṣadårbhai'' "influenza"
# some locations, including large delimited areas as well as many toponyms:
#: ''aryai'' "square", ''cahåtaibāk'' "tropics"
#: ''Rīkalīnai'', ''Mūnnakṣalte''
# all ethnonyms:
#: ''chlǣvānem'' "Chlouvānem", ''ṣurṭāgyai'' "Skyrdegan(s)", ''bronyai'' "Bronic(s)", ''sairghīṭyai'' "Cerian(s)", ''nivrahīrai'' "Nivarese"                                                 
A few nouns do not have a singular, but can have a dual and a plural form. Their citation form is usually the dual:
: ''maihadhūt'' "parents", ''grembātatālunāt'' "hide-and-seek" (most commonly a plurale tantum)
Counted among pluralia tantums are certain words which are not defective in number, but whose plural forms have an additional meaning alongside the one of the singular form, like in the following examples:
: ''hamvyenī'' "nursery" (''hamvyoe'' "cradle"), ''įsmirte'' "playground" (''įsmirtas'' "swing"), ''nacai'' "clothes" (''naca'' "cloth"), ''garaṇai'' "clock, watch" (''garaṇa'' "hour), ''lairusī'' "galaxy" (''lairē'' "sky, air"), ''ilēneyi'' "universe" (''ilēni'' "space, invisible sky").
Unlike ethnonyms, nouns formed with the suffix ''-yūs'', generally identifying a person from a certain city (e.g. ''līlasuṃghāṇyūs'', ''ajāɂilbādhyūs'') – but note ''yacvānyūs'' "Westerner" – are not pluralia tantum and have regularly-formed plurals (in ''-yaus'').


Example (''nāmvake'' “to crush, press”):
Some words are '''singularia tantum''':
* Imperfective: exterior ''nāmveinu'', ''nāmveini'', ''nāmveinė'', … interior ''nāmveiniru'', …; causative ext. ''nāmveinaxhā'', …; caus. int. ''nāmveinirxhā'', …
# many collective nouns:
* Perfective: ext. ''nāmveinau'', ''nāmveinei'', ''nāmveinitь'', … int. ''nāmveinirau'', …; caus. ext. ''nāmveinaxhlou'', …; caus. int. ''nāmveinirxhlou'', …
#: ''nūlastām'' "money", ''maula'' "breasts [pair of]", ''mæchlišam'' "leafy greens" (and particular types, e.g. ''mæcichā'' "spinach), ''bågras'' "legumes" (and particular types, e.g. ''dīlla'' "peas", ''mahīra'' "lentils"), ''lāsīm'' "cereals", ''båltis'' "free time"
* Propositive: ext. ''nāmveinikṣam'', ''nāmveinikṣa'', ''nāmveinikṣai'', … int. ''nāmveinikuru'', …; caus. ext. ''nāmveinxhiṣam'', …; caus. int. ''nāmveinxhiuru'', ...
# feelings and sensations:
#: ''lācāh'' "romantic love", ''læchlyoe'' "fun", ''ǣlna'' "sadness"
# nouns denoting certain uncountable things:
#: ''paɂeh'' "dust", ''kanai'' "spices", ''nāmvāvi'' "powder, dust made from crushing something", ''ḍolam'' "ice", ''narmis'' "ash"
# certain illnesses and health conditions:
#: ''badarauga'' "blue plague", ''kloppa'' "cough" (cf. pluralizable ''kloppukāram'' "a single instance of coughing"), ''nadirṣas'' "runny nose"
# proper nouns referring to certain concepts:
#: ''yunya'', ''lillamurḍhyā'', ''mulipenai'' "the Eastern Bloc's 'Internet'", ''tulbaiganim'' "the Eastern Bloc's 'Olympics'"
#: individual sports, such as ''tēyakaitsūh'', ''ḍaṣaras'', ''lairhiṃħa'', ''yalkhaitah''
#: cardinal points, ''pūrjayuñca'' "North", ''nalejñuñca'' "East"..., including relative ones such as ''smrāṇyuñca'' "upstream" or ''memājñuñca'' "downstream"
#: musical genres, such as ''laneika'', ''mūṃjas'', ''kerachomā'', ''tūnisus''
#: specialistic terminology made with suffixes and related to sciences (''-tarlā'', ''-nātra''), diseases (''-ræṣka'', ''-yūtam'', ''-ītsun'', ''-gulas''), and political/philosophical currents (''-nātra'', ''-lija'')
# Most toponyms:
#: ''Murkadhānāvi'' "the Inquisition", ''Kaiṣamā'', ''Ṣurṭāgah'' "Skyrdagor", ''Sairghīṭa'' "Ceria", ''Kuyugvajitava'' "Kŭyŭgwažtov"


===The desiderative mood===
===Irregular plurals===
The desiderative mood, unlike the optative, hypothetical, and subjunctive moods, conjugates in all tenses and aspects just like the indicative; the difference being the special stem it uses, formed with reduplication of the root plus '''-s''' (except for '''-ora-''' and '''-ьouš-''' verbs). The resulting stem conjugates as any root verb.
A few Chlouvānem nouns have irregular plurals:
* The word ''chlǣvānem'' itself is plural-only (like all ethnonyms) and irregular; direct and vocative are in ''-em'', but all other cases decline as a standard plural 1h noun (e.g. accusative ''chlǣvānānu'', ergative ''chlǣvānān'', genitive ''chlǣvānumi'');
* ''hulineh'' "woman" has the suppletive plural ''hulūne'' "women", which is declined as a regular 1s declension noun.
* ''maila'' “water” does not have a dual form outside of colloquial use (where ''mailāt'' is used with the meaning of “two glasses of water”) and has the irregular plural ''mailusī'', declined as the plural of an ''-oe'' noun, with ''-us-'' instead of ''-en-'' or ''-oe-'' throughout the declension (but note genitive ''mailūsmi'' and not ''mailusmi''). This plural form is actually common, used when talking about bodies of water in an area, water layers, glasses of water, and a few minor idiomatic uses (e.g. ''taili mailusilīm hilælulke'', lit. “to arrive by crossing many waters”, meaning “to have had much experience”).<br/>The ''-usī'' semantic plural is also used for the word ''damītah'' when used for "petals" (''damītusī''; the meaning of "nails" has the regular plural ''damītai''), and ''lairē'' (''lairusī'', which does not mean "skies" or "days" but "galaxy").
* Nouns with non-standard final endings (except ''chlǣvānem'') are declined by unpacking the vowel through regular saṃdhi and applying the resulting declension to the newfound root, with regular saṃdhi. The most common such nouns are ''gos'' "ford, crossing of a small river" (ga-us; gen.sg. ''ge'' (ga-i), pl. ''gaus'' (ga-aus)) and ''khaim'' "goose" (khā-im; pl. ''khaik'' (khā-īk)).
* ''švas'' "animal (including humans)" pluralizes as ''švai'', as if it were a h-noun; all cases except for direct and vocative are however regular.


Reduplication adds the first consonant of the verb (except prefixes) and its first vowel (always oral short).There are however some special rules followed in reduplicating:
===Irregular vocatives===
* Aspirated stops are always reduplicated as unaspirated;
Five very common words have common, irregular, vocative forms:
* '''g-''' is always reduplicated as '''h-''', except for a few irregular verbs;
* ''ñæltah'' "(male's) sister" — ''ñæli'' or ''ñæl''
* '''h-''' is reduplicated as '''k-''';
* ''glūkam'' "(female's) brother" — ''galū''
* '''k-''' as '''š-''';

* ''meinā'' "mother" — ''mā'' or ''mē''
* '''f-''' as '''p-''';
* ''bunā'' "father" — ''bā'' or ''vā''
* '''l-''' in the initial clusters '''lk-''', '''lkh-''', '''lg-''', or '''lgh-''' reduplicates as '''n-'''.
* ''udhyāras'' "Comrade" — ''udhyā'' (rarely ''udhyār'')
* Initial clusters which begin with '''s-''', '''ṣ-''', '''š-''', or '''v-''' use the first consonant which is not one of them (but '''šv-''' reduplicates as '''š-''');
* Verbs with ablaut always have middle-grade ablaut; '''ṛ''' reduplicates as '''a''';
* Inverse-ablaut verbs have the consonant of the unreduced root but the reduced vowel;
* Roots beginning with vowels are regular, reduplicating the otherwise allophonic initial '''ʔ'''.
* Prefixes are added before the reduplicated root.
Final added '''-s''' has some special saṃdhi rules, too (in addition to the usual ones):
* '''-d-s''' and '''-dh-s''' both become '''-ts''' (always written so and never as *ç);
* After voiced stops, '''-s''' becomes '''-r''' and aspirated stops lose aspiration. '''-j-s''' and '''-jh-s''' both become '''-jl''';
* '''-š-s''' becomes '''-kṣ''';
* '''-y-s''' becomes '''-š''';
* '''-l-s''' becomes '''-lь''' when prevocalic and '''-lš''' when preconsonantal, but '''-rl-s''' always becomes '''-relь-'''.


Causative forms just add the causative endings, without further modifying the stem.


'''-ora-''' and '''-ьeiš-''' verbs use '''-oreka-''' and '''-ьeišca-''' respectively, without other modifications, but they're often substituted by ''infinitive + daudike'' constructions. In many of the northeastern and northwestern lands of the Inquisition, this analytic construction is used instead of the synthetic desiderative in almost any case.
===Use of the plural===
Chlouvānem sometimes uses the singular in contexts where English uses the plural:
* Nouns are always singular after numerals (except, optionally, ''dani'' (two), which they can also be dual after), ''sora'' (some), ''grāṇa'' (any), ''gu'' (no), ''guviṣam'' (no other), ''taili'' (many, much), ''širē'' (more), ''kaili'' (most), and ''ṣubha'' (few, little).
** After ''yaiva'', the difference in the noun's number expresses a distinction much like the one between English "every" and "all": ''yaiva kita'' "every house", ''yaiva kitai'' "all houses".
* When referring to existence or availability of something, that something is always singular, e.g. ''dvārma širēmįs virā'' "there are chairs in the room". It may be plural if topicalized, but the overall meaning of the sentence changes - e.g. ''širēmeyi mæn dvārma virā'' "the chairs are in the room".
* When referring to a single person, ''dhāna'' (hand), ''mešīn'' (eye), and ''minnūlya'' (ear), and often also ''junai'' (foot) (more rarely for ''pājya'' (leg) and ''molnya'' (arm)) are typically singular and not dual - e.g. ''nanau mešīp mešute'' "I see it with my eyes" (lit. "with my eye"). In fact, they might be translated as "a person's hands/eyes/ears", given that dual forms are often used to mean e.g. "both hands of two people" and the plural ones for e.g. "many people's hands".
* ''junyoe'' (indoor slippers), ''rapūda'' ((thick) shoes), ''mæska'' (boots), and all types of shoes are also used in the singular to refer to a pair of them. The main exception is ''varṇaigīk'' (straw rope sandals), which is a plurale tantum.
Duals and plurals of given names have the meaning of an associative plural, i.e. ''Kālomījñai'' "Kālomīyeh and people in/of her group".


Examples of desiderative mood stems are:

==Verbs (''daradhaus'')==
* ''peithake'' “to go (multid.)”, root ''peith-'' → ''pe-peith-s'' → ''pepeits-
''
: ''Main article: [[Chlouvānem/Verbs|Chlouvānem verbs]]''
* ''lgutake'' “to buy”, root ''lgut-'' → ''nu-lgot-s'' → ''nulgots-''
* ''khlunāke'' “to search, look for”, root ''khlu-'' → ''ku-khlu-s'' → ''kukhlus-
''
* ''nilyake'' “to think”, root ''nily-'' → ''ni-nely-s'' → ''ninelš-''
* ''tṛlake'' “to do”, root ''tṛl-'' → ''ta-tarl-s'' > ''tatarelь-''
* ''valde'' “to open”, root ''vald-'' → ''v-uld-s'' > ''vults-''




A few verbs have completely irregular stems:
The Chlouvānem verb (''daradhūs'', pl. ''daradhaus'') is the most inflected part of speech; its most basic forms are fusional, but many more specific formations are more agglutinative due to their origin from old Proto-Lahob particles or participles.
* ''gyake'' “to be”: ''muñj-''
* ''lilke'' “to live”: ''lėlikṣ-''
* ''męlike'' “to give”: ''mimęñ-
''
* ''milke'' “to take”: ''mūṃchl-''.


===The necessitative mood===
==Pronouns (''hailihalenī'')==
The necessitative mood is formed and conjugates much like the desiderative; it uses a stem formed by reduplication and adding '''-asya-''', with normal saṃdhi changes.
The system of personal pronouns of modern Standard Chlouvānem is quite complex due to the honorific system. In modern Chlouvānem, the category of "pronouns" isn't actually syntactically differentiated from other nouns (except for being used anaphorically), and only some of them - the inherited pronouns from Proto-Lahob and Archaic Chlouvānem - follow a declension different from the one of nouns.


Examples:
The main reason for the complexity of the pronominal system is that there are many possible variants for each person, depending on the formality of the context, the two-way rank difference between speaker and listener, or the three-way rank difference between the speaker, the listener, and the addressee. Some particular forms are also chosen depending on gender.
* ''peithake'' “to go (multid.)”, → ''pepeithasya-''
* ''khlunāke'' “to search, look for” → ''kukhlūvsya-''
* ''nilyake'' “to think” → ''ninelyasya-''
* ''valde'' “to open” → ''vuldasya-''


===The potential mood===
The fact that there is no syntactical difference between the morphological pronouns and those that are nouns also means that every word used pronominally, including given names, requires that person's verbal concord, i.e. a given name used as a second-person pronoun will be used in concordance with a second-person verb. In the following list, words not marked as being inflected according to pronominal declension are inflected as nouns. However, '''yamei''' and '''lāma''' are honorific adpositions which do not decline; the title or given name used with them declines instead.
The potential mood also conjugates in all tenses and aspects and has a stem formed with initial reduplication. It is formed by adding '''-(e)nā-''' to the root and behaves as a fourth conjugation verb, adding an epenthetic -n before vocalic endings. Note that ''-r-nā-'' (like e.g. in all ''-ora-'' verbs) becomes '''-rṇā-''' due to saṃdhi.


Examples: ''peithake'' → ''pepeithnā-'' ; ''gṇyauke'' → ''gagṇyaunā-'' ; ''nilyake'' → ''ninelyenā-''.
===List of personal pronouns and pronoun-equivalents===
====First person singular (I, me)====
* '''lili''' (pronominal declension): the morphological inherited pronoun and the most neutral. It is overall the most used, especially in the non-direct cases, but there are alternatives for very informal, childish, slang, and humble speech.
* '''emmā''': the humble speech word for "person", sometimes used in humble speech.
* '''demi''' (pronominal declension): literally "oneself", the reflexive pronoun; used in informal speech but conveying a sense of distance.
* Given name: used in childish speech and in certain slang forms, considered rude or uneducated otherwise.
* '''lilyā hulineh''': literally "my woman", informal or semi-formal, implies superiority.
* '''paralonį emmā''': literally "the person [humble] who is a disciple" or "I, [your] disciple". Used almost exclusively in writing, by students or pupils when talking to their professors or teachers.
* '''lilyā jāyim''' (in Archaic Chlouvānem only); literally "my girl", implying humbleness. Notably used by the Chlamiṣvatrā to refer to herself throughout the Holy Books.


A special case of saṃdhi occurs in roots which end in a single '''-g''' or '''-k''': this consonant becomes '''-gh''' and the '''-n''' in the suffix becomes retroflex, e.g. ''mūmikke'' "to dance", root ''mūmik-'' > ''mumūmighṇā-'' ; ''dilge'' “to pour", root ''dig-'' > ''dideghṇā-''.
====Second person singular (You)====
* Given name plus '''lāma''': the general polite form. '''lāma''' can be replaced by an appropriate title.
* '''yamei''' + given name + '''lāma''': similar to the above, but more polite, typically used for people of much higher rank or public officials.
* '''yamei''' + title: very polite, alternative to the above two.
* Appropriate honorific formula: the most polite usage, usually progressively reduced to (''yamei'') given name + ''lāma'' or ''yamei'' + title during the course of a conversation<ref>This is due to many honorific formulae being quite long - for example, the standard honorific formula when talking to an Inquisitor is (''lallāmaha'') [matronymic] ''yamei murkadhāna'' [given name] ''lāma''.</ref>.
* Given name + '''tanta''': same politeness as ''lāma'', used respectfully towards lower-ranked people, for example workers and colleague with less experience, soldiers of lower rank, employees, apprentices, and (from seventh class onwards) by teachers towards their students.
* Given name alone: used in semi-formal speech between (equal ranked) colleagues and friends with a moderate degree of acquaintance. Can be or is rude otherwise. Note that it is considered especially rude to use the given name (or any other form of the personal name) towards older family members, or family members of the same generation who are not siblings (e.g. brothers/sisters-in-law, unless they're close friends).
* [[Chlouvānem/Names#Informal_names_.28laltihalen.C4.AB.29|Informal name]]: used in informal speech among friends, siblings (and possibly cousins<ref>With cousins, whether the informal or the given name is used depends on how close they are; with first cousins using the informal name is nearly universal, while with farther cousins the given name may be more common.</ref>), partners, and all family members of a younger generation.
* Kinship term alone: used for older family members or non-siblings (excluding cousins) of the same generation.
* '''sāmi''' (pronominal declension): the morphological pronoun used in informal speech. Often replaced by the given name or by the hypocoristic form.
* '''nami''' (pronominal declension): the morphological pronoun of formal speech towards higher ranked people. Often used (and even more often in non-core forms such as the genitive '''namyā'''), but it is also common to use the given name + ''lāma'' formula instead.
* '''tami''' (pronominal declension): morphological pronoun of formal speech towards equal ranked people. Often used alternatively to the given name (with or without ''lāma''), even in the same conversation.
* '''rami''' (pronominal declension): morphological formal pronoun for lower ranked people; same usage pattern as ''tami''.
* '''udhyāras''': translatable as "Comrade" and introduced during the Kaiṣamā era, it is a formal second-person pronoun used for people in situations transcending social rank. It is particularly used among political activists, volunteers in any organization, or in cooperative activities distinct from one's usual work. It is also the preferred option when one has no information about the addressed person, or as a general second person pronoun not referring to any particular person.
* '''ṣari''': quite old-fashioned (but still actively used by older people), used by guests towards homeowners (or innkeepers) and by soldiers towards their superiors.
* '''ūttuka''' (mostly historical except for the Northeast): similar to '''ṣari''' but mostly used by servants towards their superiors or landowners; rapidly disappeared because of the Kaiṣamā era reforms except for the Northeast, where it was used in most contexts ''ṣari'' was elsewhere.
* '''blikā'''; an endearing term for "girl", used by sisters among themselves.
* '''lorkhās'''; male counterpart to ''blikā''.
* Informal name + '''cuca''': endearing form used in informal speech by parents towards their children.
* '''nūrya''', literally "kid, child": used in formal instances by parents towards their children.


===The permissive mood===
The following pronouns are mostly used for specific people, and only as reductions of other formulae:
The permissive mood also conjugates in all tenses and aspects and is formed, without reduplication, by vowel lengthening and adding '''-ippu-''' before consonantal endings and '''-īpr-''' before vocalic ones. Note that in the present tense, dual terminations use ''-ippu-'' and the ''-dā-'' ending (not ''-odā-''); for the third plural, ''-ippuyąt'' is the commonly used form: ''-ipryąt'' is attested but extremely archaic.
* '''aveṣyotariri nami''': literally "You excellent one"; extremely formal locution for non-religious superiors several ranks ahead.
* '''gopūrṭham''': used for public/religious and military officials.
* '''gopūrṭhami brausa''': used for the highest ranked Inquisitors, bishops, head monks, and the Baptist.
* '''yobrausa''': same as ''gopūrṭhami brausa''.
* '''lalla yobrausa''': used for the Great Inquisitor.


Examples: ''mišake'' → ''mīšippu-'' > ''mīšipru'' "I am allowed to see", ''mīšippum'' “I was allowed to see”.
With second-person pronouns, the possessives used are in nearly every case those of the corresponding morphological pronouns; however, in very informal speech, it is not uncommon to use the genitive of the informal name or of pronoun-equivalents such as ''blikā'' or ''lorkhās''.


Bisyllabic roots which have as their second syllable an unstressed vowel between two consonants that may form an allowed cluster (thus sonorant-vowel-stop/fricative, except ''-m-velar'') lose this vowel while adding the suffix, e.g. ''hañilke'' > ''hūlñippu-'' ('''-ñl-''' → '''-lñ-''' is a fairly regular saṃdhi change).
====Third person singular====
Chlouvānem does not have any morphological third person pronoun; the demonstratives are used instead for non-human referents. For human referents, however, it is considered extremely rude to address them using a demonstratives. The choice of pronoun in the third person is especially complex because not just the relative rank of speaker and listener should be kept in mind, but also the rank of the addressee relative to both the speaker and the listener.


===Secondary moods: evidentiality===
All titles listed in the section [[#Honorific titles|"Honorific titles"]] may be freely used with and without names. Furthermore, it is common in not excessively formal speech to use ''nāḍima'' (honorific word for "mother") for all female older relatives - of previous generations, not older siblings - of the interlocutor and similarly ''tamvāram'' (honorific for "father") for male older relatives.
The four secondary moods expressing evidentiality are formed in two different ways. One of them has a special set of endings, while the other three add a morpheme to the verb. They are only used in the indicative, desiderative, necessitative, permissive, and potential moods, plus in first person imperatives.


The ''visual evidential'' is made by adding '''-mī''' at the end of the verb, e.g. ''yąlėmī'' "it is [being] eaten (I see it)", ''yąlėçamī'' "(s)he eats (I see it)". The ending is actually a worn down version of ''mešė'', meaning "it is seen".
'''udhyāras''', equivalent to "Comrade", is in contemporary Chlouvānem the least controversial third person pronoun, at least the only one that is never considered rude to use. However, depending on the situation, other pronouns may be more appropriate.


The ''first inferential'', which refers to any non-visual inference that is probably true (often translatable with "apparently", "looks like"), is formed by special endings, which replace the normal ones (example with ''pūnake'' "to work"):
=====Reference table=====
{| class="wikitable"
The following table is meant as a ''non-exhaustive'' reference for the ''most common'' ways used to refer to third person human referents in different situations, excluding titles:
 
{| class="redtable lightredbg" style="textalign:center"
|-
|-
! rowspan=2 colspan=2 | !! colspan=4 | First inferential endings
! colspan=2 | If... !! Speaker is higher than Listener !! Speaker is equal to Listener !! Speaker is lower than Listener
|-
|-
! Present !! Past !! Perfect !! Future
! rowspan=3 | 3SG is higher than... !! both Speaker and Listener
| ''yamei'' (name) ''lāma''<br/>''yamei'' (name) ''suntam/sintam'' || ''(yamei)'' (name) ''suntam/sintam(/lāma)'' || ''yamei'' (name) ''suntam/sintam''
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Sing. !! 1st
! Listener,<br/>but lower than or equal to Speaker
| pūn'''itasu''' || pūn'''itto''' || upūn'''itenim''' || pūn'''išenim'''
| ''udhyāras''<br/>''yamei lātiṃṣin''<br/>(name) ''lāma'' || / || /
|-
|-
! 2nd
! Speaker,<br/>but lower than or equal to Listener
| pūna'''se''' || pūn'''itte''' || upūn'''itenis''' || pūn'''išenis'''
| / || / || ''yamei'' (name) ''lāma''
|-
|-
! 3rd
! rowspan=3 | 3SG is equal to... !! Listener
| pūna'''te''' || pūn'''itti''' || upūn'''itena''' || pūn'''išena'''
| ''udhyāras''<br/>''yamei'' (name) ''tanta''<br/> (name) ''lāma'' || / || ''yamei'' (name) ''suntam/sintam''
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Dual !! 1st
! both Speaker and Listener
| pūna'''dāsu''' || pūna'''daitu''' || upūn'''itanda''' || pūn'''iṣṭāsu'''
| / || ''udhyāras''<br/>''lātiṃṣin''<br/> (name) ''lāma''<br/>''yamei'' (name) ''tanta'' || /
|-
|-
! 2nd
! Speaker
| pūna'''dāse''' || pūna'''daiti''' || upūn'''itandes''' || pūn'''iṣṭāse'''
| ''udhyāras''<br/>''lātiṃṣin''<br/> (name) ''lāma'' || / || ''yamei'' (name) ''lāma''<br/>''udhyāras''<br/>''lātiṃṣin''
|-
|-
! 3rd
! rowspan=3 | 3SG is lower than...  !! Listener
| pūna'''dātte''' || pūna'''daite''' || upūn'''itanit''' || pūn'''iṣṭātte'''
| ''udhyāras''<br/>(name) ''tanta'' || / || /
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Pl. !! 1st
! both Speaker and Listener
| pūn'''itami''' || pūn'''ichlīm''' || upūn'''itemna''' || pūn'''iṣyāmna'''
| / || ''udhyāras''<br/>(name) ''tanta'' || /
|-
|-
! 2nd
! Speaker
| pūn'''itai''' || pūn'''ichlīs''' || upūn'''iteṃša''' || pūn'''iṣyāṃša'''
| / || / || (name) ''lāma''<br/> ''udhyāras''
|-
! 3rd
| pūn'''itet''' || pūn'''itāl''' || upūn'''itena''' || pūn'''iṣyāna'''
|}
|}
Interior forms add these endings after ''-ir-'' (e.g. ''dældirte'' "(s)he apparently speaks"); causative forms add them after ''-axh-'' for interior verbs and ''-iraxh-'' for exterior ones, e.g. ''maišaxhite'' "(s)he apparently shows", ''maiširaxhite'' "(s)he apparently learns".


The ''second inferential'' has a similar function to the first inferential, but the situation is unlikely to be true (translatable e.g. with "might/apparently... but probably don't/doesn't"); it is formed by adding '''-mū''' after the first inferential endings, e.g. ''pūnatemū'' "(s)he might be working, but probably isn't". This is a worn down version of ''mbu gu'' (or not).
====Dual pronouns====
====Plural pronouns====
====Other personal pronouns====


The ''reported'' evidential marks something the speaker does not know first hand; it is formed by adding '''-kye''' after the normal endings, e.g. ''pūnėkye'' "[I was told/I heard] (s)he works". The ending is a worn down version of ''kulė'' (it is said).
====Pronominal declension====
The pronominal declension has two variants: one used for the first person pronouns and another for the 2nd person ones. First person pronouns are the most archaic: they have a single-phoneme stem in all cases bar the direct, and a different stem in the direct case ('''lili''', derived from the original pronoun *li, in the singular, and suppletive '''amūt''' and '''amūvi''' in the dual and plural respectively).<br/>The second person pronouns are a Pre-Chlouvānem innovation, from the original short stem attached to the demonstrative ''ami'', and therefore they follow that word's declension. However, the original short stems are kept as alternative, shorter forms, for the accusative, ergative, and dative cases. Second-person plural pronouns exist, but are virtually unused outside of Archaic Chlouvānem.


=== The consequential secondary moods===
All ergative singular forms in ''-ei'' have literary variants in ''-eis'' (cf. ''emeis'', ergative of ''emibe'' "one").
The two consequential secondary moods can actually be tertiary moods, as they can be added to evidential secondary moods too.


The consequential mood of cause is formed by adding '''-ę''' + '''pian(e)-''' to the verb stem. For example ''pūnu'' → ''pūnępianu'' (given that I work, ...); ''pupūṃśi'' → ''pupūṃsępiani'' (given that you want to work, ...), or ''pūnitti'' → ''pūnępianitti'' (given that, apparently, (s)he worked, ...).
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
 
The consequential mood of opposition is similarly formed by adding '''-ę''' + '''gām(u)-''' to the verb stem. For example ''pūnu'' → ''pūnęgāmu'' (even if I work, ...); ''pupūṃśi'' → ''pupūṃsęgāmi'' (even if you want to work, ...), or ''pūnitti'' → ''pūnęgāmitti'' (even if, apparently, (s)he worked, ...).
 
===Participles and adverbials===
'''Participles''' are formed by suffixing the appropriate set of participle endings to the stem. The set marks the tense/aspect combination; the stem may be in indicative, necessitative, desiderative, permissive, or potential mood, plus any secondary evidential mood.
 
The endings are (in patient-trigger/common voice):
* Present: exterior '''-susas''', ''-susam'', ''-susah'' — interior '''-sūnis''', ''-sūnim'', ''-sūneh''
* Past: exterior '''-(n)das''', ''-(n)dam'', ''-(n)dah'' — interior '''-dris''', ''-drim'', ''-dreh''
* Perfect: exterior '''-cās''', ''-cām'', ''-cāh'' — interior '''-cænas''', ''-cænam'', ''-cænah''
* Future: exterior '''-iṣvas''', ''-iṣvam'', ''-iṣvah'' — interior '''-iṣunis''', ''-iṣunim'', ''-iṣuneh''
 
Voice endings are inserted after the participle, but after all prefixes in prefixed stems. Saṃdhi is fairly regular, but direct case ''-s'' is deleted except with the dative-trigger affix. Examples: ''męlьsusas'', ''męlьsusaça'' but ''primęlьsusas'', ''priçamęlьsusas''.
 
Note that voice endings, if final, are always at the end, even if the participle is inflected for case: direct ''męlьsusakæ'' (the one benefacted by giving) but dative ''męlьsusuikæ'' (to the one benefacted by giving).
 
'''Adverbials''' are formed just like participles by adding a set of endings to the stem. There are two types of adverbials: '''homofocals''', used when the trigger of the adverbial and of the main verb are the same, and '''heterofocals''', used when they are different.
* Present: homofocal '''-lie''' (ext), '''-līne''' (int) — heterofocal '''-nikai''' (ext), '''-ninėk''' (int)
* Past: homofocal '''-lūte''' (ext), '''-lūnde''' (int) — heterofocal '''-nakte''' (ext), '''-nalget''' (int)
* Perfect: homofocal '''-līse''', (ext) '''-līmen''' (int) — heterofocal '''-nikṣe''' (ext), '''-nikñe''' (int)
* Future: homofocal '''-iṣre''' (ext), '''-iṣrāṇi''' (int) — heterofocal '''-iṣṇei''' (ext), '''-iṣāṇin''' (int).
 
Like participles, adverbials have voice affixes after them, but before the root in prefixed verbs. A palatalized consonant becomes a consonant followed by '''i'''. Examples: ''męlilie'', ''męlilieça'', ''primęlilie'', ''priçamęlilie''.
 
====Impersonal verbs====
Impersonal verbs, in Chlouvānem, are those verbs that are defective and only conjugated in third person exterior (with the partial exception of ''giṃšake'') and only used in patient-trigger voice. There are six such -basic- verbs:
* ''gårḍake'' (to be meant to)
* ''hælьte'' (to be moved, touched)
* ''maṣvake'' (to feel compassion, pity)
* ''ñælftake'' (to repent, to feel remorse, to be sorry for)
* ''prābake'' (to be disgusted)
* ''giṃšake'' (to get/be bored) — usually termed “half-impersonal” because it has a full interior conjugation, but with a different meaning (to be boring).
 
These verbs all have their cause in the exessive case (or a subjunctive verb) and the affected being in the dative; gårḍake usually only has a subjunctive. Examples:
: ''låh tamiāt maivat hælьtitь'' “what (s)he said <small>(literally: his/her word)</small> moved me.”
: ''glidrirāyem låh ñælftė'' “I’m sorry for how I behaved.”
: ''priūsimęlīṃsętå gårḍitь'' “you were meant to give it back to me” (literally: it was meant that you give it back to me<ref>Note that in such a phrase the perfective subjunctive would have a different meaning, namely “to have already given it back to me”.</ref>) .
 
Derived forms usually behave as impersonal too, like ''taprābake'' (to hate).
 
===Irregular verbs===
Chlouvānem has fourteen major irregular verbs, plus other three with peculiar irregularities. The thirteen major irregular verbs all have different stems in either past and perfect or both; the verb ''gyake'' (to be) is extremely irregular due to suppletion, while ''æflike'' (to plan, to be going to) is a truly defective verb.<br/>The other twelve major suppletive verbs are (regular stems are <small>''in smaller size italic''</small>):
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! Verb !! Present stem (without ablaut) !! Past stem !! Perfect stem
! colspan=4 | !! Direct !! Accusative !! Ergative !!  Genitive !! Translative !! Exessive !! Essive !!  Dative !! Ablative !! Locative !! Instrumental
|-
|-
| ''aphake'' (to turn) || aph-a- || <small>''aph-a-''</small> || āft-a-
! rowspan=5 | Singular !! colspan=3 | 1st person
| '''lili''' || lū || lei || lyai<br/>lilyā || lan || lat || lįs || lum || ląu || lēn || lāni
|-
|-
| ''einerke'' (to float (multidir.)) || einer- || paiṇṣ- || iʔīneṣ-
! rowspan=4 | 2nd person !! colspan=2 | Informal
| '''sāmi''' || sāmyū<br/>sū || sāmī<br/>sei || sāmī || sāmīn || sāmīt || sāmįs || sāmūm<br/>som || sāmų || sāmǣ || sāmūni
|-
|-
| ''flulke'' (to go, walk (monodir.)) || flun- || māṃs-a- || taul-
! colspan=2 | Form. sup.
| '''nami''' || namyū<br/>nū || namī<br/>nei || namī || namīn || namīt || namįs || namūm<br/>num || namų || namǣ || namūni
|-
|-
| ''ghūmake'' (to blow) || ghūm-a- || <small>''ghūm-a-''</small> || ghumuṣṭ-a-
! colspan=2 | Form. equal
| '''tami''' || tamyū<br/>tū || tamī<br/>tei || tamī || tamīn || tamīt || tamįs || tamūm<br/>tum || tamų || tamǣ || tamūni
|-
|-
| ''ikhlake'' (to stab) || ikhl-a- || <small>''ikhl-a-''</small> || īkheṣṭ-a-
! colspan=2 | Form. inf.
| '''rami''' || ramyū<br/>nū || ramī<br/>nei || ramī || ramīn || ramīt || ramįs || ramūm<br/>rum || ramų || ramǣ || ramūṇi
|-
|-
| ''keṃšake'' (to use) || caṃš-a- || keṃš-a- || <small>''ekeṃš-a-''</small>
! colspan=4 | Reflexive pronoun
| '''demi''' || jū || jei || jai<br/>demyā || jen || jet || jįs || jum || jąu || jēn || jāni
|-
|-
| ''khilyake'' (to write) || khily-a- || paṃšy-a- || <small>''ikhily-a-''</small>
! rowspan=5 | Dual !! colspan=3 | 1st person
| '''amūt''' || lūṣa || lūra || lūva || lūh || lūbhan || lūnne || lūh || lūbhan || lūnne || lūbhan
|-
|-
| ''milke'' (to take, seize, catch, capture) || milūk-/milk- || milk- || ilak-
! rowspan=4 | 2nd person !! colspan=2 | Informal
| '''sāmīt''' || sāmīṣa<br/>seṣa || sāmīra<br/>sera || sāmīva || sāmirį || sāmibhan || sāminne || sāmirį<br/>seh || sāmibhan || sāminne || sāmibhan
|-
|-
| ''mṛcce'' (to run (monodir.)) || mṛc- || pañc- || <small>''amṛc-''</small>
! colspan=2 | Form. sup.
| '''namīt''' || namīṣa<br/>nīṣa || namīra<br/>nira || namīva || namirį || namibhan || naminne || namirį<br/>nih || namibhan || naminne || namibhan
|-
|-
| ''peithake'' (to go, walk (multidir.)) || peith-a- || papth-a- || apoth-a-
! colspan=2 | Form. equal
| '''tamīt''' || tamīṣa<br/>tīṣa || tamīra<br/>tira || tamīva || tamirį || tamibhan || taminne || tamirį<br/>tih || tamibhan || taminne || tamibhan
|-
|-
| ''yahike'' (to read; <small>''arch.:'' to understand</small>) || yahь- || taiši- || ašahь-
! colspan=2 | Form. inf.
| '''ramīt''' || ramīṣa<br/>rīṣa || ramīra<br/>rira || ramīva || ramirį || ramibhan || raminne || ramirį<br/>rih || ramibhan || raminne || ramibhan
|-
|-
| ''yuṇake'' (to powder; to break with the hands) || yuṇ-a- || <small>''yuṇ-a-''</small> || yuṇuṣṭ-a-
! Plural !! colspan=3 | 1st person
| '''amūvi''' || laih || lān || lumi || lemān || lenīs || lāra || lisām || lenīs || lelīm || lenīka
|}
|}
Note that ''paiṇṣ-'', ''māṃṣ-'', ''paṃšy-'', ''pañc-'', ''papth-'', and ''taiši-'' all use the '''present''' endings instead of the '''past''' ones.


''æflike'' (to plan, to be going to) is an unmarked agentive verb, which is only conjugated as agentive, and has an irregular present stem ''æftil-'', with a zero ending for the third person singular. It usually only takes verbs or verbal phrases as arguments, e.g. ''keitu dhāsmike æftil'' "(s)he is going/plans to save the whale".<br/>
====Honorific titles====
Note that the defectiveness does not apply to its derived forms - e.g. ''švæflike'' (to believe): ''švæftilu'' "I am believed", ''šuçayæftilu'' "I believe" - and ''æflike'' itself has regular causative forms (with the meaning of "make X intend to do").
''→ See also: [[Chlouvānem/Names#Using_names|Chlouvānem names § Using names]]''
 
Chlouvānem uses many honorific titles, which are always used in non-familiar speech. The "honorific" adjective ''yamei'' is often added to many of them - especially ''lāma'' - and is mandatory in other ones.
* '''lāma''' - used after the noun, it is the most common honorific title; almost every time someone is being addressed, ''lāma'' is used - the only exceptions being when it is already known another honorific should be used, or in familiar situations. It usually follows the given name alone (e.g. ''Namihūlša lāma''); if the matronymic is added (sometimes done in order to disambiguate), then ''lāma'' comes between matronymic and noun (e.g. ''Līṭhaljāyimāvi lāma Namihūlša''). All three names matronymic, surname, and given name together with ''lāma'' (e.g. ''Līṭhaljāyimāvi Kaleñchokah Namihūlša lāma'') are only used in very formal addressing from a list of nouns; should matronymic+noun be not enough to distinguish two people, simply surname+noun is used.
* '''tanta''' - used for people in a lower position, e.g. used towards one's employees or (usually from seventh class onwards) by teachers and professors towards their students. Also used by militars towards lower-ranked soldiers.
* '''suntam''' (regionally also ''sintam'') - used for people in a higher position in certain situations, most commonly towards older and more experienced colleagues (but not teachers or professors, nor work bosses if they're roughly the same age as the speaker).
* '''lallāmaha''' - an extremely formal honorific, used for public authorities and all Inquisitors. Most often used together with ''yamei''. Inquisitors may also be referred to as ''lallāmaha + <small>matronymic</small> + yamei + <small>given name</small> + murkadhāna (lāma)''
* '''jūlin''' - less formal than ''lāma'', used for people who work in one's home but are not part of the family.
* '''tallam''' - less formal than ''lāma'', used by men for unmarried women whom they know somewhat well. Currently less frequently used than it was up to about 10 years ago.
* '''jāmilšīreh''' - used in military contexts towards higher-ranked people, or by common people towards military commanders in service.
* '''udhyā(ras)''' - neutral but respectful title of address, often used when generally speaking and without knowing who the listener is. Sometimes used, when in a plural sense, in the form '''yamei dāvudhyāre'''. In its neutralness relative to rank, it can be compared with the Soviet-era use of ''товарищ''. It is also how high-ranked Inquisitors and most monks address the general public.<br/>Note that ''udhyāras'' is the direct form, ''udhyā'' the irregular vocative.
* '''pūrivāla''' - an impersonal term of address used in written language, towards unfamiliar people never met personally. Often used as ''yamei'' [name] ''pūrivāla''.
* '''cuca''' is not strictly an honorific, as it pertains to more colloquial forms of speech, but it works the same way. It has a diminutive and endearing meaning, not unlike Japanese ''-chan''. In formal speech, it is often used towards and when speaking about children.


Three verbs have further irregularities:
=====Occupations commonly used as titles=====
* The singular present indicative forms of ''flulke'' are irregular ''flå'', ''flin'', and ''fliven''.
* '''camitorai''' — head of a company (usually as [matronymic] ''yamei'' [name] ''camitorai lāma'')
* ''milke'' uses the stem ''milk-'' also in the singular present indicative: ''milku'', ''milki'', ''milkė''.
* '''kauchlærīn''' (voc.: ''kauchlærī'') — professor (in universities, seminaries, institutions, and work schools)
* ''flulke'' and ''męlike'' have the irregular optative stems ''fleina-'' and ''męliouna-'' (instead of expected *fluneina- and *męlieina-).
* '''tatnāmęlīn''' (voc.: ''tatnāmęlī'') — teacher (in first and basic schools)


The pair ''tamišake⁓tildake'' (to look at) is not counted as one of the thirteen irregular verbs, but ''tildake'' is an unmarked agentive verb, while ''tamišake'' is used in all other voices. Note that however ''tamišake'' also has a regular agentive voice, synonymous with ''tildake'': ''teldu'' ⁓ ''taçamešu'' (I look at). The verb ''najake'' "to happen" (explained below among the compounds of ''gyake'') is also sometimes considered irregular, as a verb with an unmarked dative-trigger voice.<br/>Prefixed motion verbs are also not marked for voice in the patient- and agent-trigger ones (with only cases on nouns distinguishing them), but that is considered a particular but regular behaviour of a semantically defined subset of verbs.
=====Official titles=====
Where not noted, the formula is [matronymic] ''yamei'' [name] [title] ''lāma''.


====The verb "to be" (gyake)====
* '''brausamailenya''' — Baptist — rendered as ''aveṣyotārire lallāmaha'' [matronymic] ''yamei'' [surname + given name] ''brausamailenia lāma''.
The verb "to be" is suppletive as it uses various different stems (from Proto-Lahob ''*gəjó'', ''*woŋ—*uŋ'', ''*mōws'' respectively) and irregularly — for example, the future indicative is morphologically a present.
* '''camimurkadhāna''' — Great Inquisitor — rendered as ''širē aveṣyotārire lallāmaha'' [matronymic] ''yamei'' [surname + given name] ''camimurkadhāna lāma''.
* '''camitorai''' — president (of diocesan parliaments or executives or of foreign countries). Rendered as ''aveṣyotārire'' [matronymic (if Chlouvānem)] ''yamei'' [name] ''camitorai lāma''.
* '''plušamelīs''' (voc.: ''plušamelī'') — Prefect (head of an Office (''plušamila'') of the Inquisition). Rendered as ''aveṣyotārire'' [matronymic] ''yamei'' [name] ''plušamelī(s) lāma''.
* '''gatvā''' — leader/head/president/mayor — preceded by the genitive of the respective administration (''ṣramāṇa'' "province", ''lalka'' "circuit", ''hālgāra'' "district", ''marta'' "city"…).
* '''hurdagīn''' — Head Monk (head of a monastery) — rendered as ''kaili brausire yamei [name] hurdagīn lāma'' (+ monastery name-<small>GEN</small>)<ref>Many head monks have their own unique titles based on their monastery. For example the head monk of the Vādhaṃšvāti Lake Monastery is not referred as ''[…] hurdagīn lāma vādhaṃšvāti ga gūltayi'' but as ''[…] laliājuniāmiti jāṇi camilālta lāma'', literally "Great Guardian of the Field of the Night Bloom".</ref>
* '''rākṣaṇa''' — Bishop (head of a diocese) — rendered as ''aveṣyotārire'' [matronymic] ''yamei'' [(surname +) name] ''rākṣaṇa lāma'' (+ diocese name-<small>GEN</small>).
* '''lallaplušamelīs''' (voc.: ''lallaplušamelī'') — High Prefect (head of the Table of Offices (''flušamaili eṇāh'', the executive branch of the Inquisition). Usually rendered as ''taili aveṣyotārire'' [matronymic] ''yamei'' [name] ''lallaplušamelī(s) lāma''.
* '''lallamurkadhāna''' — High Inquisitor (one of the 612 members of the Inquisitorial Conclave (''murkadhānumi lanedāmeh'', the legislative branch of the Inquisition). Usually rendered as ''aveṣyotārire'' [matronymic] ''yamei'' [name] ''lallamurkadhāna lāma''.
* '''ñæltryam''' — monk.
* '''nīrvakṣari''' (voc.: ''nīrvakṣarī'') — Eparch (head of an Eparchy).


Note that the indicative present is very rarely used, as the copula is usually dropped in most cases; when used with the meaning of "to have" (e.g. ''lili mæn tulūʔa yambras uñyąt'' "I have six pears" (lit.: I <small>TOPIC</small> six pears are)) it is considered better not to drop it, but it is often done nevertheless in common speech.
Note that the full titles are used generally at the first mention only. For example, ''Martayināvi yamei murkadhāna Læhimausa lāma'' becomes afterwards either ''yamei murkadhāna'' or ''yamei Læhimausa lāma''. With the Great Inquisitor, this does not usually get shorter than ''širē aveṣyotārire yamei lallāmaha'' ([Her] Respectable Most Excellent Highness) or ''širē aveṣyotārire lallāmaha camimurkadhāna'' ([Her] Most Excellent Highness, the Great Inquisitor).


=====Indicative mood=====
===Correlatives===
{| class="wikitable"
Chlouvānem has a fairly regular system of correlatives, distinguishing ten types (proximal, medial, distal, interrogative, negative, assertive existential, elective existential, universal, positive alternative, and negative alternative) in eleven categories (attributive, thing, person, time, place, destination, origin, way, reason, quality, quantity).
|-
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
! Person !! Present !! Past !! Perfect !! Future
|-
| 1SG || valu || mos || egyam || mavū
|-
| 2SG || vali || moçi || egyes || mavei
|-
|-
| 3SG || væl || mitь || egya || mavė
! Category ↓ / Type → !! Proximal !! Medial !! Distal !! Interrogative !! Negative !! Ass. exist. !! Elect. exist. !! Universal !! Positive altern. !! Negative altern.
|-
|-
| 1DU || undām || mordam || egyonda || maudām
! Attributive
| rowspan=2 | ''nenē''<br/><small>(and others; see below)</small><br/>this (one) || rowspan=2 | ''nunū''<br/><small>(and others; see below)</small><br/>that (one) (near you) || rowspan=2 | ''nanā''<br/><small>(and others; see below)</small><br/>that (one) (over there) || rowspan=2 | ''yanū?''<br/>what?, which (one) ? || ''gu''<br/>no || ''sora''<br/>some || ''grāṇa''<br/>any || rowspan=2 | ''yaiva''<br/>every(thing) || ''viṣam''<br/>another, other || ''guviṣam''<br/>no other
|-
|-
| 2DU || undās || mordas || egyodes || maudās
! Thing
| ''gomi''<br/>nothing || ''sorami''<br/>something || ''grāṇami''<br/>anything || ''viṣāmi''<br/>something else || ''guviṣāmi''<br/>nothing else
|-
|-
| 3DU || undau || mordu || egyot || maudāvo
! Person
| ''·evita''<br/>this one || ''·utvita''<br/>that one (near you) || ''·ātvita''<br/>that one (over there) || ''yavita?''<br/>who? || ''guvita''<br/>no one || ''soraita''<br/>someone || ''grāmvita''<br/>anyone || ''yaivita''<br/>everyone || ''viṣvita''<br/>someone else || ''guviṣvita''<br/>no one else
|-
|-
| 1PL || ummi || monajam || egyamia || maumui
! Time
| ''emiya''<br/>now || ''utiya''<br/>then || ''ātiya''<br/>then (remote) || ''yamiya?''<br/>when? || ''gumiya''<br/>never || ''soramiya''<br/>sometime, somewhen || ''grāmiya''<br/>anytime, whenever || ''yaivmiya''<br/>always, everytime || ''viṣmiya''<br/>sometime else || ''guviṣmiya''<br/>never else
|-
|-
| 2PL || ulki || marogan || egyasia || maukui
! Place
| ''·ejulā''<br/>here || ''·uñjulā''<br/>there || ''·āñjulā''<br/>over there || ''yajulā?''<br/>where? || ''gujulā''<br/>nowhere || ''sorajulā''<br/>somewhere || ''grāñjulā''<br/>anywhere || ''yavijulā''<br/>everywhere || ''viñjulā''<br/>elsewhere || ''guviñjulā''<br/>nowhere else
|-
|-
| 3PL || unęn || mayona || egya || mavęn
! Destination
|}
| ''·ejulyom''<br/>hither || ''·uñjulyom''<br/>thither || ''·āñjulyom''<br/> thither (remote) || ''yajulyom?''<br/>whither? || ''gujulyom''<br/>nowhither || ''sorajulyom''<br/>somewhither || ''grāñjulyom''<br/>anywhither || ''yavijulyom''<br/>everywhither || ''viñjulyom''<br/>elsewhither || ''guviñjulyom''<br/>nowhither else
 
=====Other primary moods=====
All other primary mood formations use irregular stems, except for the subjunctive, hypothetical, and imperative which are the only ones using ''gya-'' as in the infinitive: ''jeiv-a-'' for the optative and propositive, ''muñj-a-'' for the desiderative, ''mokṣy-a-'' for the necessitative, ''ginā-'' for the potential and ''maippu-/maipr-'' for the permissive.
 
Present tense or imperfective aspect of all other primary moods included as examples in this table:
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! Person !! Imperative !! Subjunctive !! Hypothetical !! Optative !! Propositive !! Desiderative !! Necessitative !! Potential !! Permissive
! Source
| ''·ejulų''<br/>hence || ''·uñjulų''<br/>thence || ''·āñjulų''<br/> thence (remote) || ''yajulų?''<br/>whence? || ''gujulų''<br/>nowhence ||  ''sorajulų''<br/>somewhence || ''grāñjulų''<br/>anywhence || ''yavijulų''<br/>everywhence || ''viñjulų''<br/>elsewhence || ''guviñjulų''<br/>nowhence else
|-
|-
| 1SG || gyekṣam || gīn || gyatiam || jeivu || jeivikṣam || muñju || mokṣyu || ginau || maipru
! Manner
| ''elīce''<br/>thus, hereby || ''ūlīce''<br/>thereby || ''ālīce''<br/>thereby; that other way || ''yalīce?''<br/>how? || ''gulīce''<br/>no way || ''soralīce''<br/>somehow || ''grāṃlīce''<br/>anyhow || ''yaivlīce''<br/>everyway || ''viṣlīce''<br/>otherwise || ''guviṣlīce''<br/>no other way
|-
|-
| 2SG || gyekṣa || gyėši || gyatųs || jeivi || jeivikṣa || muñji || mokṣyi || ginai || maipri
! Reason
| ''emena''<br/>herefore || ''utmena''<br/>therefore || ''ātmena''<br/>therefore; for that other reason || ''yamenat?''<br/>why? || ''gumena''<br/>for no reason || ''soramena''<br/>somewhy || ''grāmena''<br/>whyever, for any reason || ''yaivmena''<br/>for every reason || ''viṣmena''<br/>for another reason || ''guviṣmena''<br/>for no other reason
|-
|-
| 3SG || gyekṣai || gyāsi || gyatṛ || jeivė || jeivikṣai || muñje || mokṣyė || ginai || maiprė
! Quality
| ''esmā''<br/>this kind || ''utsmā''<br/>that kind || ''ātsmā''<br/>that other kind || ''yasmāt?''<br/>which kind? || ''gusmā''<br/>no kind || ''sorasmā''<br/>some kind || ''grāṇismā''<br/>any kind || ''yavismā''<br/>every kind || ''viṣasmā''<br/>another kind || ''guviṣasmā''<br/>no other kind
|-
|-
| 1DU || — || gyėjyam || gyadītem || jeivodām || — || muñjodām || mokṣyodām || ginaudām || maippudām
! Quantity
|-
| ''enūḍa''<br/>this much || ''utnūḍa''<br/>that much || ''ātnūḍa''<br/>that much (remote) || ''yanūḍat?''<br/>how much? || ''gunūḍa''<br/>none || ''soraṇūḍa''<br/>some of it || ''grāṇūḍa''<br/>any much || ''yaivnūḍa''<br/>all of it || ''viṣṇūḍa''<br/>another quantity || ''guviṣṇūḍa''<br/>no other quantity
| 2DU || — || gyėši || gyadītų || jeivodās || — || muñjodās || mokṣyodās || ginaudās || maippudās
|-
| 3DU || — || gyėti || gyadītṛ || jeivodāvo || — || muñjodāvo || mokṣyodāvo || ginaudāvo || maippudāvo
|-
| 1PL || gyekṣumi || gyėmiui || gyacemi || jeivamui || jeivikṣumi || muñjamui || mokṣyamui || gināmui || maippumui
|-
| 2PL || gyekṣus || gyėši || gyacųsi || jeivakui || jeivikṣus || muñjakui || mokṣyakui || ginākui || maippukui
|-
| 3PL || gyekṣat || gyėti || gyašri || jeivęn || jeivikṣat || muñjęn || mokṣęn || gināyęn || maippuyęn<br/><small>''maipryęn'' attested but archaic</small>
|}
|}


=====In compound verbs=====
Note that in common speach ''ālīce'' and ''ūlīce'' as well as ''ātmena'' and ''utmena'' are basically interchangeable. The <small>QUALITY</small> correlatives may take an essive argument, e.g. ''lajlęs grāṇismā'' "any kind of chair".<br/><small>THING</small> and <small>PERSON</small> correlatives decline for case and, in the case of ''evita'', ''utvita'', and ''ātvita'', also for number (1h declension: ''evita'', acc. sg. ''evitu'', dir. pl. ''evitai'', dat. pl. ''evitesām''…). <small>QUALITY</small> and <small>QUANTITY</small> correlatives also decline for case.
There are some compound verbs which are formed by a "meaning stem" + ''gyake''; they conjugate just like ''gyake'' does:
* ''pṛšcāṃgyake'' "to like"<ref>More properly "to be pleasing", e.g. ''lunai låh pṛšcāmvæl'' "tea is pleasing to me" → "I like tea".</ref> → present ''pṛšcāmvalu'', ''pṛšcāmvali'', ''pṛšcāmvæl''... past ''pṛšcāmmos'', ''pṛšcāmmoçi'', ''pṛšcāmmitь''... perfect ''pṛšcāmegyam''... future ''pṛšcāmmavū'' ; the same in other moods, e.g. necessitative present ''pṛšcāmmokṣyu'', ''pṛšcāmmokṣyi''...<br/>Note that in colloquial speech the form of ''gyake'' is omitted in the present indicative, e.g. ''pṛšcām'' is "to be pleasing" for all persons.
* ''najake'' "to happen" (''nañ-gya-'', irregular saṃdhi) morphologically conjugates like ''gyake'' but has some peculiarities:
** Like ''gyake'', there is no agent-, dative-, and instrumental-trigger voice, but the patient-trigger voice has a dative meaning - e.g. ''navalu'' "it happens to me".
** The basic, semantically patientive forms, are the interior ones (with the stem ''nañ-gy-ir''), and they only exist for the third persons - e.g. ''najire'' "it happens", ''najirdāvo'' "they (dual) happen", ''najirųt'' "they happen", and so on.
** It uses analytic constructions for most moods, e.g. ''najakenovake'' "can happen" > ''najakenovė'' "it can happen"; ''najakedaudike'' "to be wanted to happen" > ''najakedaudiuça'' "I want it to happen" — forms such as the synthetic ''najinai'' or ''namuñjuça'' are found only in archaic (mostly pre-Classical) texts or with other uses - as e.g. ''najinai'' being the most common word for "maybe".


===Analytic constructions and auxiliary verbs===
Not to be confused with their literal English translations are ''yaivemibe'' (or ''yaiva emibe'') "each, every" (literally "everyone") - which is most often attributive only in Chlouvānem - and especially ''sora emibe'', literally "someone", which has a completely different meaning: ''sora emibe'' denotes "some single subjects, considered as single entities, hence inherently plural and taking plural verbs: ''sora emibe draikate'' "some single subjects did it" ≠ ''soraita dṛkte'' "someone did it".
Chlouvānem uses many analytic constructions - including auxiliary and compound verbs - in order to convey some shades of meaning. Most of these use either a participle or the infinitive as the form of the lexical verb:
* ''perfect participle'' in the needed voice + ''gyake'' in the past or future tense: compound construction used for pluperfect and future perfect. It is not wrong to use it with a present tense, but the meaning does not change from the bare perfect.<br/> Note that, for the pluperfect, the bare perfect is often used instead, both in literature as in common speech.
** ''uyųlcąça mos'' "I had eaten"
** ''uyųlcąça mavū'' "I will have eaten"
* ''present participle'' in the needed voice + ''gyake'' in the needed tense: compound construction used for the progressive aspect in the three tenses (present, past, future). In the present, the form of ''gyake'' is omitted for the third person, or for all persons if a pronoun is present.
** ''yųlasusąça valu'' "I am eating"
** ''yųlasusąça mos'' "I was eating"
** ''yųlasusąça mavū'' "I will be eating"
* ''infinitive'' + ''ñeaʔake'' (to be used to): compound construction used for a habitual action in present, past, or future tense. It is not used with motion verbs in the present, as the multidirectional verb already unambiguously has this meaning.
** ''yaive prājamne yahikeñeaʔuça'' "I am used to read every evening"
** ''yaive prājamne yahikeñeaʔaṃça'' "I used to read every evening"
** ''yaive prājamne yahikeñeaʔiṣyaṃça'' "I will be used to read every evening"
* ''infinitive'' + ''nartaflulke'' (to reach): to come to X, to end up X-ing, to result in X-ing
** ''yųlakenartaçafliven'' "(s)he ended up eating"
** ''lañšorakenartaflunirųt'' "they ended up marrying each other"
* ''infinitive'' (or more formally ''perfect participle'') + ''kitte'' (to put): to keep X-ed:
** ''valdekitė'' / ''uvaldacās kitė'' "it is kept opened"
* ''infinitive'' + either ''smitiāke'' (to hang from) or ''maitiāke'' (to be in front of): prospective aspect, to be about to X
** ''yųlakesmiçatimu'' "I am about to eat"
** ''yahikemaitimė'' "it is about to be read"
* ''infinitive'' + ''māyammišake'' (to look further away): to let X
** ''yahikemāyaṃçamešuisė'' "I let you read"
* ''infinitive'' + ''mālchake'' (to run (multidirectional)): to keep X-ing (less formal alternative to ''trān-'' prefixed verbs)
**  ''yahikemālchuçå'' "I keep reading it" (synonym of ''trānçayašutå'')


==Pronouns==
Negatives, elective existentials, universals, and positive alternatives for thing and person correlatives may also take dual number:
Chlouvānem has a series of pronouns which are irregular when compared to other nouns, yet they follow a mostly similar pattern among themselves. As with nouns and adjectives, in Chlouvānem there is mostly no difference between possessive and demonstrative pronouns and adjectives. Note that ''pronouns'' here are defined as a morphological category, as there are many pronominal locutions or nouns acting as pronouns in the Chlouvānem honorific system. Familiar and neutral styles of Chlouvānem speech use these only.
: ''gomīt～guvitāt'' "neither";
: ''grāṇamīt～grāmvitāt'' "either";
: ''yaivāt～yaivitāt'' "both";
: ''viṣāmāt～viṣvitāt'' "the other one".


Standard Chlouvānem as spoken today uses the following pronouns:
Further correlatives not included in the above table:
* 1st person '''lili''' (sg.), '''lileidi''' (dual), and '''mayin''' (pl.).
: ''yambā?'' (whose?)
* 2nd person '''sāmi''' (sg.), '''sāmeidi''' (dual), and '''nagin''' (pl.).
: ''smāmi'' (such a...) <small>(archaic, literary)</small>
* 3rd person ''parrot'' '''tami''' (sg.), '''tameidi''' (dual), and '''toman''' (pl.).
* 3rd person ''dragon'' '''tes''' (sg.) and '''tyuše''' (pl.), and 3rd person ''lotus'' '''tem''' (sg.) and '''tyume''' (pl.) — they are only distinct from the ''parrot'' forms in direct, accusative, and ergative; ''tameidi'' is used as dual for all three genders.
* Reflexive '''demi''' (mandatory for 3rd person, commonly used also for 1st and 2nd).


The pronouns doubling as adjectives are:
====Positional demonstratives====
* Three demonstrative series, all declining for gender but not for number: proximal '''nenė''' (parrot), '''nenayes''' (dragon), '''nenayem''' (lotus); medial '''nunū''' (p.), '''numves''' (d.), '''numvem''' (l.); distal '''nanā''' (p.), '''nanās''' (d.), '''nanām''' (l.).
Chlouvānem has a large number of demonstratives, as they are integrated with the system of [[Chlouvānem/Positional_and_motion_verbs#Positional_verbs_.28jalyadaradhaus.29|positional verbs]], combining a general proximal-medial-distal distinction with positional prefixes, further localizing them in space. Only a subset of 10 out of the 24 positional prefixes are used to build demonstratives; the ones with a ∅- prefix correspond to most of the unused ones, and may be translated as "this/that one in front/ahead/in the middle" when a disambiguation from another one is needed. The same ten prefixes (except for ''įs-'') are also used together with the <small>PERSON</small> series (with the same logic), and with the <small>PLACE</small>, <small>DESTINATION</small>, and <small>SOURCE</small> correlatives, which act as adverbial anaphoras of positional and motion verbs. This results in forms like ''kamyejulā'' "here, around" or ''māhāñjulyom'' "thither (remote), rightwards".
* The possessives: '''liliā''' (''lilem, liles''); '''meyā''' (''meyem, meyes''); '''sāmiā''' (''sāmim, sāmes''); '''negā''' (''negem, neges''); '''tamiā''' (''tamim, tames''); '''tašñā''' (''tašñem, tašñes''); '''demiā''' (''demim, demes'').


Note that both the demonstrative and the possessives are often not declined for gender in common speech in certain areas, most notably the densely populated area of the Jade Coast, including Līlasuṃghāṇa, Līlta, Galiākina, Ilėnimarta, and a few areas near Līṭhalyinām, Talliė, and Lāltaṣveya — an area inhabited by around 100 million people. This also happens in and near Līlikanāna, fourth largest city of the Inquisition, largest in the Southern Far East.<br/>
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
Among younger speakers in some areas the Jade Coast, most notably in Līlasuṃghāṇa, Taitepamba, and Mileyīkhā, they are not inflected at all, e.g. ''lili nanā phėcamu mišau'' "I saw that cat", standard ''lili nanāmu phėcamu mišau''.
 
In addition, '''yani''' is an emphatic pronoun not properly part of common speech (''demi'' is used instead) but sometimes found in high style. Archaic Chlouvānem had a demonstrative series consisting of proximal '''ami''' (''em, es''), medial '''uteni''' (''utam, utas''), and distal '''āteni''' (''ātam, ātas''), which declined in use throughout Classical times, when they were replaced by the newer ''nenė — nunū — nanā'' forms.
 
''ami - em - es'' is still used regionally around the mid-course of the Lāmiejāya where it has been repurposed as a definiteness marker for non-triggered arguments - Standard Chlouvānem usually topicalizes the argument or uses ''nanā'', or, colloquially, leaves it unmarked and only understandable by context; c.f. "the tiger is seen by the wolf":
: ''<small>(Standard):</small> ėmīla nanie bāḍhmānei mešė'', or ''bāḍhmān mæn ėmīla mėšė'', or ''ėmīla bāḍhmānei mėšė''.
: ''<small>(Mid-Lāmiejāyi):</small> ėmīla emie bāḍhmānei mešė''.
 
=== Personal pronouns ===
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! rowspan=2 colspan=3 | !! rowspan=2 | Direct !! colspan=2 | Accusative !! colspan=2 | Ergative !! rowspan=2 | Genitive !! rowspan=2 | Translative !! rowspan=2 | Exessive !! rowspan=2 | Essive !! rowspan=2 | Dative !! rowspan=2 | Ablative !! rowspan=2 | Locative
|-
! <small>Full</small> !! <small>Clitic</small> !! <small>Full</small> !! <small>Clitic</small>
|-
! rowspan=5 | Singular !! colspan=2 | 1st person
| '''lili''' || læl || <small>-(y)æl</small> || lilęi || <small>-(i)lį</small> || liliā || liñ || litь || lęsь || låh || ląu || lea
|-
|-
! colspan=2 | 2nd person
! Prefix ↓ / Type → !! Proximal !! Medial !! Distal
| '''sāmi''' || saim || <small>-(s)es</small> || sāmęi || <small>-(i)sę</small> || sāmiā || sāñ || sātь || sąsь || såh || sąu || sea
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | 3rd person !! Parrot
! ∅- (ahead)
| '''tami''' || tamiu || rowspan=3 | <small>-(t)å</small> || tamie || rowspan=3 | <small>-(i)tę</small> || tamiā<br/><small>''arch.:'' tamiai</small> || rowspan=3 | tañ || rowspan=3 | tatь || rowspan=3 | tąsь || rowspan=3 | tåh || rowspan=3 | tąu || rowspan=3 | tea
| ''nenē''<br/>this one ahead || ''nunū''<br/>that one (near you) ahead || ''nanā''<br/>that one ahead
|-
|-
! Dragon
! ān- (above)
| '''tes''' || teṣu || tesie || tamiā<br/><small>''arch.:'' tesiai</small>
| ''āninē''<br/>this one above || ''ānnū''<br/>that one (near you) above || ''ānnā''<br/>that one above
|-
|-
! Lotus
! šu- (below)
| '''tem''' || temu || temie || tamiā<br/><small>''arch.:'' temñi</small>
| ''šunē''<br/>this one below || ''šūnū''<br/>that one (near you) below || ''šonā''<br/>that one below
|-
|-
! colspan=3 | Reflexive pronoun
! įs- (hanging)
| '''demi''' || deim || <small>-(i)dan</small> || demęi || <small>-(i)dę</small> || demiā || deñ || detь || dęsь || dåh || dąu || dea
| ''įsinē''<br/>this one hanging || ''įsunū''<br/>that one (near you) hanging || ''įsanā''<br/>that one hanging
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | Dual !! colspan=2 | 1st person
! na(ñ)- (inside)
| '''lileidi''' || lildū || <small>-(y)ælda</small> || lilden || <small>-(i)lįda</small> || lildes || lildoh || lildās || lildūn || lildotь || lildīs || lildīm
| ''najinē''<br/>this one inside || ''najunū''<br/>that one (near you) inside || ''najanā''<br/>that one inside
|-
|-
! colspan=2 | 2nd person
! kau- (outside)
| '''sāmeidi''' || sādhū || <small>-(s)erda</small> || sādhen || <small>-(i)sęda</small> || sādhes || sādhoh || sādhās || sādhūn || sādhotь || sādhīs || sādhīm
| ''kaunē''<br/>this one outside || ''kaunū''<br/>that one (near you) outside || ''kaunā''<br/>that one outside
|-
|-
! 3rd person !! <small>All genders</small>
! kami- (around)
| '''tameidi''' || tadhū || <small>-(t)åda</small> || tadhen || <small>-(i)tęda</small> || tadhes || tadhoh || tadhās || tadhūn || tadhotь || tadhīs || tadhīm
| ''kaminē''<br/>this one around || ''kamyunū''<br/>that one (near you) around || ''kamyanā''<br/>that one around
|-
|-
! rowspan=5 | Plural !! colspan=2 | 1st person
! pri- (behind)
| '''mayan''' || mau || <small>-(y)ælnu</small> || mayęi || <small>-(i)lįnu</small> || maiyā || maiñ || maitь || maisь || måyoh || mayąu || męea
| ''prinē''<br/>this one behind || ''prinū''<br/>that one (near you) behind || ''prinā''<br/>that one behind
|-
|-
! colspan=2 | 2nd person
! vai- (beside; in the corner)<br/><small>(''sāṭ-'' for the main meaning)</small>
| '''nagan''' || nåk || <small>-(s)esnu</small> || nagęi || <small>-(i)sęnu</small> || najyā || negiñ || negitь || negisь || någoh || nagąu || nagea
| ''vainē''<br/>this one beside || ''vayunū''<br/>that one (near you) beside || ''vayanā''<br/>that one beside
|-
|-
! rowspan=3 | 3rd person !! Parrot
! vyā- (left)
| '''toman''' || tomau || rowspan=3 | <small>-(t)ånu</small> || tomān || rowspan=3 | <small>-(i)tęnu</small> || rowspan=3 | tomiā || rowspan=3 | tomiñ || rowspan=3 | tomitь || rowspan=3 | tomesь || rowspan=3 | tomåh || rowspan=3 | tomąu || rowspan=3 | tomyea
| ''vyāɂinē''<br/>this one to the left || ''vyāɂunū''<br/>that one (near you) to the left || ''vyāɂanā''<br/>that one to the left
|-
|-
! Dragon
! māha- (right)
| '''tyuše''' || tyušau || tyušān
| ''māhenē''<br/>this one to the right || ''māhonū''<br/>that one (near you) to the right || ''māhānā''<br/>that one to the right
|-
! Lotus
| '''tyune''' || tyumau || tyumān
|-
! colspan=3 | <small>Emphatic pronoun (archaic)</small>
| '''yani''' || colspan=2 | yaim || colspan=2 | yanęi || yaniā || yañ || yatь || yąsь || yåh || yąu || yea
|}
|}
The ''įs-'' forms may also be used for things lying on people's hands.


====Honorific second person pronouns====
The forms for the <small>PERSON</small>, <small>PLACE</small>, <small>DESTINATION</small>, and <small>SOURCE</small> series are mostly formed through regular saṃdhi (with the partial exception of the ''na(ñ)-'' and ''vyā-'' prefixes):
Most honorific second person pronouns have been adapted to the ''-i'' declension of pronouns, with some exceptions (taken by nominal declensions). Clitic forms are always ''-(s)es''/''-(i)sę'' for singular, ''-(s)erda''/''-(i)sęda'' for dual, and ''-(s)esnu''/''-(i)sęnu'' for plural:
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
 
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! !! Direct !! Accusative !! Ergative !! Genitive !! Translative !! Exessive !! Essive !! Dative !! Ablative !! Locative
! Prefix ↓ / Base → !! ''·evita<br/>·ejulā<br/>·ejulyom<br/>·ejulų'' !! ''·utvita<br/>·uñjulā<br/>·uñjulyom<br/>·uñjulų'' !! ''·ātvita<br/>·āñjulā<br/>·āñjulyom<br/>·āñjulų''
|-
|-
! rowspan=6 | Singular
! ∅- (ahead)
| '''nujābi'''<br/><small>also ''yonujābi''</small> || nujābyu || nujābęi || nujābeah || nujāñ || nujātь || nująsь || nujåh || nująu || nujea
| ''evita'' || ''utvita'' || ''ātvita''
|-
|-
| '''fåri''' || fåriu || fåręi || fåreah || fåñ || fåtь || fąsь || fåh || fąu || fea
! ān- (above)
| ''ānevita'' || ''ānutvita'' || ''ānātvita''
|-
|-
| '''yomahi''' || yomašu || yomahęi || yomaheah || yomañ || yomatь || yomąsь || yomåh || yomąu || yomea
! šu- (below)
| ''švevita'' || ''šūtvita'' || ''švātvita''
|-
|-
| '''yañji''' || yañju || yañjęi || yañjeah || yañjiñ || yañjitь || yañjęsь || yañjåh || yañjąu || yañjea
! na(ñ)- (inside)
| ''naivita'' || ''notvita'' || ''nātvita''
|-
|-
| '''ūṣṭhi''' || ūṣṭhi || ūṣṭhęi || ūṣṭheah || ūṣṭhiñ || ūṣṭhitь || ūṣṭhęsь || ūṣṭhåh || ūṣṭhąu || ūṣṭhea
! kau- (outside)
| ''kāvevita'' || ''kāvutvita'' || ''kāvātvita''
|-
|-
| '''yavaṣi''' || yavaṣyu || yavaṣęi || yavaṣeah || yavṣañ || yavṣatь || yavṣęsь || yavṣåh || yavṣąu || yavṣea
! kami- (around)
| ''kamyevitai'' || ''kamyutvitai'' || ''kamyātvitai''
|-
|-
! rowspan=4 | Dual
! pri- (behind)
| '''nujāvdi''' || nujāvdhū || nujāvdhen || nujāvdhes || nujāvdhoh || nujāvdhās || nujāvdhūn || nujāvdhotь || nujāvdhīs || nujāvdhīm
| ''pryevita'' || ''pryutvita'' || ''pryātvita''
|-
|-
| '''fårdi''' || fårdhū  || fårdhen || fårdhes || fårdhoh || fårdhās || fårdhūn || fårdhotь || fårdhīs || fårdhīm
! vai- (beside, in the corner)
| ''vāyevita'' || ''vāyutvita'' || ''vāyātvita''
|-
|-
| '''yañjadi''' || yañjadhū || yañjadhen || yañjadhes || yañjadhoh || yañjadhās || yañjadhūn || yañjadhotь || yañjadhīs || yañjadhīm
! vyā- (left)
| ''vyāɂevita'' || ''vyāɂutvita'' || ''vyāɂātvita''
|-
|-
| '''ūṣṭhodi''' || uṣṭhodū || ūṣṭhoden || ūṣṭhodes || ūṣṭhodoh || ūṣṭhodās || ūṣṭhodūn || ūṣṭhodotь || ūṣṭhodīs || ūṣṭhodīm
! māha- (right)
| ''māhaivita'' || ''māhotvita'' || ''māhātvita''
|}
|}
Note that, in the <small>PERSON</small> series, the ''kami-'' forms are only used with a plural meaning, as reflected in the table above.


=== Correlatives ===
====Declensions of correlatives and possessives====
Chlouvānem has a fairly regular system of correlatives, distinguishing eleven types (proximal, medial, distal, relative, interrogative, negative, assertive existential, elective existential, universal, positive alternative, and negative alternative) in eleven categories (attributive, thing, person, time, place, destination, origin, way, reason, quality, quantity).
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
{| class="wikitable"
|-
! rowspan=2 | Case || ā-paradigm !! ē-paradigm !! ū-paradigm !! t-paradigm
|-
|-
! Category ↓ / Type → !! Proximal !! Medial !! Distal !! Relative !! Interrogative !! Negative !! Ass. exist. !! Elect. exist. !! Universal !! Positive altern. !! Negative altern.
! <small>All possessives, ''nanā'' and other distals,<br/> ''yambā?'', ''ami'', correlatives in ''-i''<ref>e.g. ''sorami'', ''grāṇami''…</ref></small> !! <small>''nenē'' and other proximals</small> !! <small>''nunū'', and other medials, ''yanū?''</small> !! <small>''yasmāt?'' and ''yanūḍat?''</small>
|-
|-
| Attributive || ''nenė''<br/>this || ''nunū''<br/>that (near you) || ''nanā''<br/>that (over there) || — || ''yananū?''<br/>what?, which? || ''gu''<br/>no || ''nūši''<br/>some || ''læti''<br/>any || ''yaiva''<br/>every || ''viṣam''<br/>another || ''guviṣam''<br/>no other
! Direct<br/>Vocative
| '''lilyā''' || '''nenē''' || '''nunū''' || '''yasmāt'''
|-
|-
| Thing || ''nenė''<br/>this one || ''nunū''<br/>that one (near you) || ''nanā''<br/>that one (over there) || ''tejāmi'' || ''yananū?''<br/>what?, which? || ''gvami''<br/>nothing || ''nūšami''<br/>something || ''lætyami''<br/>anything || ''yaiva''<br/>everything || ''viṣāmi''<br/>something else || ''guviṣāmi''<br/>nothing else
! Accusative
| lilyau || nenyu || nunūyu || yasmau
|-
|-
| Person || ''evita''<br/>this one || ''utvita''<br/>that one (near you) || ''ātvita''<br/>that one (over there) || ''tėvita'' || ''yavita?''<br/>who? || ''guvita''<br/>no one || ''nūšvita''<br/>someone || ''lævita''<br/>anyone || ''yaivita''<br/>everyone || ''viṣvita''<br/>someone else || ''guviṣvita''<br/>no one else
! Ergative
| lilye || nenye || nunūye || yasmātei
|-
|-
| Time || ''emiya''<br/>now || ''utiya''<br/>then || ''ātiya''<br/>then (remote) || ''tėmiya'' || ''yamiya?''<br/>when? || ''gumiya''<br/>never || ''nūšmiya''<br/>sometime, somewhen || ''lætmiya''<br/>anytime, whenever || ''yaivmiya''<br/>always, everytime || ''viṣmiya''<br/>sometime else || ''guviṣmiya''<br/>never else
! Genitive
| lilyai || neniai || nunūyai || yasmai
|-
|-
| Place || ''ejulā''<br/>here || ''uñjulā''<br/>there || ''āñjulā''<br/>over there || ''tėjulā'' || ''yajulā?''<br/>where? || ''gujulā''<br/>nowhere || ''nūñjulā''<br/>somewhere || ''læjulā''<br/>anywhere || ''yavijulā''<br/>everywhere || ''viñjulā''<br/>elsewhere || ''guviñjulā''<br/>nowhere else
! Translative
| lilyān || nenēn || nunūn || yasmān
|-
|-
| Destination || ''ejulåh''<br/>hence || ''uñjulåh''<br/>thence || ''āñjulåh''<br/>thence (remote) || ''tėjulåh'' || ''yajulåh?''<br/>whence? || ''gujulåh''<br/>nowhence || ''nūñjulåh''<br/>somewhence || ''læjulåh''<br/>anywhence || ''yavijulåh''<br/>everywhence || ''viñjulåh''<br/>elsewhence || ''guviñjulåh''<br/>nowhence else
! Exessive
| lilyāt || nenēt || nunūt || yasmātat
|-
|-
| Source || ''ejulųu''<br/>hither || ''uñjulųu''<br/>thither || ''āñjulųu''<br/>thither (remote) || ''tėjulųu'' || ''yajulųu?''<br/>whither? || ''gujulųu''<br/>nowhither ||  ''nūñjulųu''<br/>somewhither || ''læjulųu''<br/>anywhither || ''yavijulųu''<br/>everywhither || ''viñjulųu''<br/>elsewhither || ''guviñjulųu''<br/>nowhither else
! Essive
| lilyą || nenę || nunų || yasmātą
|-
|-
| Manner || ''elīce''<br/>thus, hereby || ''ūlīce''<br/>thereby || ''ālīce''<br/>thereby; that other way || ''tėlīce'' || ''yalīce?''<br/>how? || ''gulīce''<br/>no way || ''nūšlīce''<br/>somehow || ''lælīce''<br/>anyhow || ''yaivlīce''<br/>everyway || ''viṣlīce''<br/>otherwise || ''guviṣlīce''<br/>no other way
! Dative
| lilyåh || nenǣh || nunǣh || yasmātom
|-
|-
| Reason || ''emena''<br/>herefore || ''utmena''<br/>therefore || ''ātmena''<br/>therefore; for that other reason || ''tėmena''  || ''yamenat?''<br/>why? || ''gumena''<br/>for no reason || ''nūšmena''<br/>somewhy || ''lætmena''<br/>whyever, for any reason || ''yaivmena''<br/>for every reason || ''viṣmena''<br/>for another reason || ''guviṣmena''<br/>for no other reason
! Ablative
| lilyąu || nenēhu || nunūvu || yasmąu
|-
|-
| Quality || ''esmā''<br/>this kind || ''uçmā''<br/>that kind || ''āçmā''<br/>that other kind || ''tėsmā'' || ''yasmāt?''<br/>which kind? || ''gusmā''<br/>no kind || ''nūkṣmā''<br/>some kind || ''læsmā''<br/>any kind || ''yavismā''<br/>every kind || ''viṣasmā''<br/>another kind || ''guviṣasmā''<br/>no other kind
! Locative
| lilǣ || neniǣ || nunūvǣ || yasmātǣ
|-
|-
| Quantity || ''enūḍa''<br/>this much || ''utnūḍa''<br/>that much || ''ātnūḍa''<br/>that much (remote) || ''tėnūḍa'' || ''yanūḍat?''<br/>how much? || ''gunūḍa''<br/>none || ''nūšinūḍa''<br/>some of it || ''lætnūḍa''<br/>any much || ''yaivnūḍa''<br/>all of it || ''viṣṇūḍa''<br/>another quantity || ''guviṣṇūḍa''<br/>no other quantity
! Instrumental
| lileni || nenēni || nunauni || yasmaini
|}
|}


Note that in common speach ''ālīce'' and ''ūlīce'' as well as ''ātmena'' and ''utmena'' are basically interchangeable, except for main clauses in relative structures where only ''ālīce'' and ''ātmena'' are used. The quality correlatives may take an essive argument, e.g. ''kadięs læsmā'' "any kind of chair".<br/>Thing and person correlatives decline for case and, in the case of proximal, medial, and distal, also for number. Those which end in ''-i'' decline like pronouns.
<!-- ==Honorifics==
===Honorific pronouns===
====Second person====
The rules for second person pronouns are mostly fairly easy. There are usually two contexts: formal and informal.  


Negatives, elective existentials, universals, and positive alternatives for thing and person correlatives may also take dual number: ''gvamidi''/''guvitadi'' "neither"; ''lætyamidi''/''lævitadi'' "either"; ''yaivadi''/''yaivitadi'' "both"; ''viṣāmidi''/''viṣvitadi'' "the other one".
Formal pronouns are three and (in contemporary Chlouvānem) invariable for gender, but they vary for relative rank instead: '''nami''' is used towards a superior, '''tami''' towards one of the same rank, and '''ravi''' towards a lower ranked person (until around 6350, ''nani'' was strictly feminine and ''ravi'' strictly masculine, and the rules for all three varied also according to the relative genders). '''nanak''', '''tanak''', and '''raṇak''' are their respective dual forms.<br/>
Plural second person pronouns are usually two: '''yakaliyātam''' is used towards the representative of a specifically defined group - an institution or a company -, while '''yavyāta''' (but also, in not extremely formal styles, ''nami'') is used for less defined groups.


==Honorifics==
There are, however, more formal second-person pronouns with a limited use. All of these (here listed in Latin alphabetical order), unless noted, are morphologically nouns, but they are used with second person verbs anyway:

===Honorific pronouns===
* '''aveṣyotariri nami''' (locution with the pronoun ''nami'') is sometimes used towards the highest ranked non-religious superiors, if they are several ranks ahead: examples include commanders of a military brigade or presidents of a company. However, ''nami'' is in most cases respectful enough; it is however invariably used in the set phrase ''lālyu nanyau aveṣyotariri yaccechlašute nami'' "I humbly ask for your forgiveness".
There are many different pronouns used for second and third person in honorific speech. The rules for using them are mostly dictated by the distance between the two speakers, and, for third persons, the relative distance between them. If a pronoun has no dual form, in dual contexts either one of the plural pronouns, depending on context, is used.
* '''gopūrṭham''' is often used towards public/religious and military officials.
* '''gopūrṭhami brausa''' (or '''yobrausa''') are used for the highest ranked Inquisitors, bishops, head monks, and the Baptist.
* '''lalla yobrausa''' is used exclusively for the Great Inquisitor.

* '''ṣari''', nowadays mostly old-fashioned, was used by guests towards homeowners and also by soldiers towards their superiors. It also meant, aside from being a pronoun, "landowner" or "head of a non-religious state"; in contemporary Chlouvānem it mostly only survives as a vocative expression towards homeowners when used by guests<ref>It also survives as a morpheme in some words, most notably ''ṣarivāṇa'' "state, country".</ref>.
* '''ūttuka''' is today only used in parts of the Northeast (aside by fictional characters in historical settings), but until about 6300 was a common pronoun word used by servants towards their superiors, particularly landowners (it thus partially overlapped with ''ṣari'').
* '''yobrausa''' — see ''gopūrṭhami brausa'' above.


Second person generally used these pronouns:


It is also important to note that it's increasingly common to simply use the vocative formula - given name plus ''lāma'' - instead of any pronoun in formal context: when speaking to a superior named Lārtāvi Vaihātiai ''Lælithiam'', in order to say a sentence like "have you already done (it)?", ''nami nanau dadrāste nāṭ dām?'' and ''lælicham lāma nanau dadrāste nāṭ dām?'' are both just as correct. The pronoun forms are more commonly used in other cases, particularly in the genitive.<br/>Note that ''lāma'' itself does <small>NOT</small> decline: only the noun does – e.g. ''lælichamom lāma lę emęlya'' "it has been given by me to you/Mr. Lælithiam".
* '''sāmi''', is used in familiar registers and between females or between males if they are not strangers and they're all of the same rank or of similar age.
* '''nujābi''' is used by females for all strangers and for males and nonbinary people of the same rank as them; males use it for male strangers and males of higher rank. Dual: ''nujāvdi''.
* '''yonujābi''' is a somewhat more formal alternative to ''nujābi''.
* '''fåri''' is used by females for all non-stranger females and nonbinary people of higher rank. Males and nonbinary people use it for all females except close friends and relatives. Dual: ''fårdi''.
* '''yomahi''' is a moderately familiar pronoun, kinda intermediate between ''sāmi'' and ''fåri/nujābi''.
* '''yañji''' is used by females and nonbinary people for same rank nonbinary people, and by males for same- and higher rank nonbinary people. Dual: ''yañjyadi''.
* '''ūṣṭhi''' is used by females for all people of lower rank, by males for lower rank males, and by nonbinary people for lower rank nonbinary people. Dual: ''ūṣṭhodi''.
* '''yavaṣi''' is used by males for lower rank nonbinary people and by nonbinary people for lower rank males.
* '''gopūrṭham''' is an extremely formal pronoun, used with public officials.
** '''(go)pūrṭhami brausa''' or '''yo-brausa''' is used for the highest ranked Inquisitors and for the Baptist.
*** '''lalla yo-brausa''' is used exclusively for the Great Inquisitor.
* '''ya-kaliyātam''' is a ''plural'' pronoun, used when speaking to a representative of a specifically defined group (institution or company).
* '''yavyāta''' is a ''plural'' pronoun used for generic, less defined groups.


Third person pronouns vary according to whether the third person referent is higher, lower, or equal to the second person, and for each of these cases the relative rank of first and second person further determine which pronoun should be used. In some cases, a third person feminine person requires a different pronoun from a masculine one.<br/> Note that all forms here are for singular pronouns; unless noted they're all nouns (except ''tami'') and they are pluralized regularly if needed.
In '''informal''' contexts, the only basic morphological second-person pronoun is '''sāmi''', which has the dual form '''sanak''' and uses '''nami''' as the plural form (with plural agreement on verbs). However, there may be even more informal contexts where other nouns may be used: the prototypical example is among siblings, where '''blikā''' (dual ''blikāt'', plural ''blikai''), an endearing term for girls (think of Japanese ''-chan'' or ''-tan'') is used as a pronoun for and among sisters — e.g. ''blikā meyom umuṣeste tane<ref>''tane'' is a colloquial contraction of ''dām'' (interrogative particle) and ''nane'' (emphatic tag question particle).</ref>?'' meaning "did you ask mum or not?"; as for all nouns standing for pronouns, this is not a vocative expression as it declines for case - e.g. ''blikom emęliaṃte nāṭ!'' "I've already given it to you!"; other such pro-nouns used among siblings are '''lorkhās''' (for and among brothers; literally "guy", can be rude outside this context), '''nājhali''' (non-binary equivalent to "girl" and "boy" — somewhat rarer as even in general use it's a more neutral term than either ''blikā'' or ''lorkhās''), and even '''samin''' (literally "kid"). [[Chlouvānem/Names#Informal_names_.28laltihalen.C4.AB.29|Informal names]] are also sometimes used instead of pronouns among siblings, and they're more often than not used that way among close friends and ''kaleyai''<ref>A ''kaleya'' is a "spiritual friend" in Chlouvānem culture — this word can be translated with "best friend", but it also evokes particular religious meanings.</ref>.


If 3S is higher than 2S and...
====Third person====
* ...1S is lower than 2S, '''lalla yañša''' is used.
In Chlouvānem, the third person pronouns – which are the demonstrative sets, most commonly the distal ''nanā'' – are not used for people; the name of the person referred to with the appropriate honorific title is used instead.
* ...1S is equal to 2S, '''lalla yañša''' is used, or just '''tami''' in familiar registers.
* ...1S is higher than 2S, then:
** if 3S is lower than 1S, '''āte-liluyani''' (inflects as the pronoun ''yani'') is used invariably if 1S is female; for male 3S only if 1S is male too.
** if 3S is lower than 1S, '''yañša''' is used for female 3S by male 1S; it is optional by female 1S.
** if 3S is equal to 1S, '''yo-yardam''' is used.
** if 3S is higher than 1S, '''lallayuṭhā''' is used (rarely pluralized even if referring to a plural subject).
If 3S is equal to 2S and...
* ...1S is lower than both, '''yo-yardam''' is used.
* ...1S is equal to both, '''kemura''' is used, or just '''tami''' in familiar registers.
* ...1S is higher than both, '''yardam''' is used.
If 3S is lower than 2S and...
* ...1S is also lower than 2S, '''tami''' is invariably used by females and by 1S males for 3S males; '''ui-hulyn''' is used by 1S males for 3S females.
* ...1S is equal to 2S, '''kemura''' is used, or just '''tami''' in familiar registers.
* ...1S is higher than both, '''kemura''' is used for all 3S males and usually by 1S females for 3S females; '''yañsa''' is mandatory by 1S males for 3S females, and optional by 1S females.


Note that familiar registers (which often include code-switching between Chlouvānem and a local vernacular), when used, may override any convention: as an extreme example, any very close friend or relative of the Great Inquisitor would refer to her as ''sāmi'' (and not ''lalla yo-brausa''); however this is obviously only possible in private contexts (while same-ranked people may use a familiar register in public - e.g. on the workplace).
Repetition of names is usually not considered strange in Chlouvānem, but there are a few ways to avoid excessive repetition. The most natural one is obviously to state the person once at the beginning as the topic and then have all following verbs agree with it through the trigger system.
 
===Honorific titles===
Chlouvānem uses many honorific titles, which are always used in non-familiar speech. The "honorific" adjective ''yamei'' is often added to many of them - especially ''lāma'' - and is mandatory in other ones.
* '''lāma''' - used after the noun, it is the most common honorific title; almost every time someone is being addressed, ''lāma'' is used - the only exceptions being when it is already known another honorific should be used, or in familiar situations. It usually follows the given name alone (e.g. ''Namihūlša lāma''); if the matronymic is added (sometimes done in order to disambiguate), then ''lāma'' comes between matronymic and noun (e.g. ''Līṭhaljāyimāvi lāma Namihūlša''). All three names matronymic, surname, and given name together with ''lāma'' (e.g. ''Līṭhaljāyimāvi Kaleñchokah Namihūlša lāma'') are only used in very formal addressing from a list of nouns; should matronymic+noun be not enough to distinguish two people, simply surname+noun is used.
* '''tanta''' - used for people in a lower position, e.g. used towards one's employees or (usually from seventh class onwards) by teachers and professors towards their students. Also used by militars towards lower-ranked soldiers.
* '''suntam''' (regionally also ''sintam'') - used for people in a higher position in certain situations, most commonly towards older and more experienced colleagues (but not teachers or professors, nor work bosses if they're roughly the same age as the speaker).
* '''lallāmaha''' - an extremely formal honorific, used for public authorities and all Inquisitors. Most often used together with ''yamei''. Inquisitors may also be referred to as ''lallāmaha + <small>matronymic</small> + yamei + <small>given name</small> + murkadhāna (lāma)''
* '''jūlin''' - less formal than ''lāma'', used for people who work in one's home but are not part of the family.
* '''telen''' - less formal than ''lāma'', used by men for unmarried women whom they know somewhat well. Currently less frequently used than it was up to about 10 years ago.
* '''jāmilšīreh''' - used in military contexts towards higher-ranked people, or by common people towards military commanders in service.
* '''dhārāti''' - neutral but respectful title of address, often used when generally speaking and without knowing who the listener is. Sometimes used, when in a plural sense, in the form '''yamei ui-dhārātīye'''. In its neutralness relative to rank, it can be compared with the Soviet-era use of ''товарищ''.
* '''cuca''' is not strictly an honorific, as it pertains to more colloquial forms of speech, but it works the same way. It has a diminutive and endearing meaning, not unlike Japanese ''-chan''. In formal speech, it is often used towards and when speaking about children.


Two special formulas are used for the most important people in the Inquisition:
Especially in contemporary Chlouvānem, the rank-neutral ''udhyāras'' (cf. "Comrade") is increasingly commonly used as a generic third person pronoun, though only after stating the name before.
* ''aveṣyotāra lallāmaha'' + matronymic + ''yamei'' + surname + given name + ''brausamailenia lāma'' for the Baptist (roughly "[Her]<ref>Since the laws on gender equality of 4E 56 (77 years ago), the role of Baptist, the second most important in the Inquisition, may be held by a male, but so far no male person has ever been Baptist. On the other hand, only females may be Great Inquisitors.</ref> Excellent Highness, Baptist ...");
* ''nanū aveṣyotāra lallāmaha'' + matronymic + ''yamei'' + surname + given name + ''camimurkadhāna lāma'' for the Great Inquisitor ("[Her] Most Excellent Highness, Great Inquisitor ...").


===Honorific particles===
===Honorific particles===
There are a few honorific particles - mostly of Ancient Kūṣṛmāthi origin - that are used to make names or nouns honorific:
There are a few honorific particles - mostly of Ancient Kūṣṛmāthi origin - that are used to make names or nouns honorific:
* '''spa''' makes a verb polite and is put after a verb.
* '''yoṣa''' has roughly the same function as ''spa'', but is more polite; pay attention that while ''spa'' may be used freely with same- and lower-ranked people, ''yoṣa'' in those contexts is considered excessive to the point of being insulting.
* '''īvai''' makes a verb humble, and is put after a verb, too.
* '''īvai''' makes a verb humble, and is put after a verb, too.
* '''yaši''' is an alternative to ''spa'' and ''yoṣa'' but always used with third-person verbs. It is always after personal suffixes but, in unprefixed verbs, before the voice, e.g. ''darė yaši'' → ''darėyašiça''
* '''nami''' denotes respect towards the trigger of the verb. It was common in the past alongside the honorific verb ''tilah'', but today it rarely used.
* '''nami''' denotes respect towards the trigger of the verb.
* '''yo-''' is a prefix for things pertaining to a honourable person, often used together with a verb with '''nami'''.
* '''yo-''' is a prefix for things pertaining to a honourable person, often used together with a verb with '''nami'''.
* '''ui-''' is a prefix that makes nouns honorific.
* '''dau-''' is a prefix that makes nouns honorific. -->


==Numerals - Mālendān ==
==Numerals (''māltsāk'') ==
Chlouvānem is one of the few human Calemerian languages - together with all other [[Lahob languages]] and a few ones of the southern hemisphere, as well as others like [[Qualdomelic#Numerals|Qualdomelic]] or vernaculars of the Inquisition which have had considerable Chlouvānem influence - with a pure duodecimal number system.


Chlouvānem is one of the few human Calemerian languages - together with all other [[Lahob languages]] and a few ones of the southern hemisphere - with a pure duodecimal number system.
Numbers (sg ''māltsām'', pl. ''māltsāk'') have six different forms: cardinal, ordinal, collective, distributive, adverbial/multiplicative, and fractionary. 1-4 have separate adverbial multiplicative forms, while all other ones have an invariable form used both as adverbial and 'adjectival' multiplicatives. Cardinals from 1 to Ɛ and their compounds decline for case (see below); collectives, multiplicatives, and fractionaries always decline, while ordinals are only declined if used without an accompanying noun. Distributives do not decline.


Numbers (sg/pl. ''mālendān'') have six different forms: cardinal, ordinal, collective, distributive, adverbial/multiplicative, and fractionary. Cardinal 1, 2, 3, and 4 are declinable adjectives, as are all ordinal and collective ones; 1-4 have separate adverbial forms, while all other ones have an invariable adjective used as multiplicative and a derived adverb used as adverbial. All distributive, fractionary, and cardinal (except 1-4 and compounds) numbers are invariable.
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
 
{| class="wikitable"
|-
|-
! Digit<sub>12</sub> !! <small>Base 10</small> !! Cardinal !! Ordinal !! Collective !! Distributive !! Adv./Multiplicative !! Fractionary
! Digit<sub>12</sub> !! <small>Base 10</small> !! Cardinal !! Ordinal !! Collective !! Distributive !! Adv./Multiplicative !! Fractionary
|-
|-
! 0
! 0
| 0 || '''ajrā''' || <small>''(ajrāyendes)''</small> || <small>''(ajrāmūh)''</small> || <small>''(ajrehaicė)''</small> || <small>''(lājrā)''</small> || —
| 0 || '''ajrā''' || <small>''(ajrāyende)''</small> || rowspan=2 | — || <small>''(ajrehaicē)''</small> || <small>''(māgajrā)''</small> || —
|-
|-
! 1
! 1
| 1 || '''leil'''<br/>leilum<br/>leila || lahīlas || leilamūh || leiluhaicė || leilahæl / lāleil<br/><small>(lāleilum, lāleila)</small> || lahīlvāṭ
| 1 || '''emibe'''<br/>''emi'' || lahīla || emibhaicē || māgemibe <small>''(adv.)''</small><br/>emibarvīm || lahīlvāṭ
|-
|-
! 2
! 2
| 2 || '''dani'''<br/>danīm<br/>danīh || hælinaikas || daniamūh || danihaicė || danihæl / lādani<br/><small>(lādanīm, lādanīh)</small> || hælinaivāṭ
| 2 || '''dani'''|| hælinaika || danyatām || danihaicē || māgdani <small>''(adv.)''</small><br/>danirvīm || hælinaivāṭ
|-
|-
! 3
! 3
| 3 || '''pāmvi'''<br/>pāmvim<br/>pāmveh || pāmvendes || pāmvimūh || pāmvihaicė || pāmvihæl / lāpāmvi<br/><small>(lāpāmvim, lāpāmveh)</small> || pāmvendvāṭ
| 3 || '''pāmvi''' || pāmvende || pāmvyatām || pāmvihaicē || māmpāmvi <small>''(adv.)''</small><br/>pāmvirvīm || pāmvendvāṭ
|-
|-
! 4
! 4
| 4 || '''yårṣe'''<br/>yårṣem<br/>yårṣeh || yårṣendes || yårṣmūh || yårṣhaicė || yårṣhæl / lāyårṣe<br/><small>(lāyårṣem, lāyårṣeh)</small> || yårṣendvāṭ
| 4 || '''nęlte''' || nęltende || nęltitām || nęltehaicē || māgnęlte <small>''(adv.)''</small><br/>nęltarvīm || nęltendvāṭ
|-
|-
! 5
! 5
| 5 || '''furḍe''' || furḍendes || furḍamūh || furḍhaicė || lāfurḍe || furḍendvāṭ
| 5 || '''šulka''' || šulkende || šulkatām || šulkhaicē || šulkarvīm || šulkendvāṭ
|-
|-
! 6
! 6
| 6 || '''tulūʔa''' || tulūʔendes || tulūʔamūh || tulūʔihaicė || lātulūʔa || tulūʔendvāṭ
| 6 || '''tulūɂa''' || tulūɂende || tulūɂatām || tulūɂihaicē || tulūrvīm || tulūɂendvāṭ
|-
|-
! 7
! 7
| 7 || '''chīka''' || chīcændes || chīkamūh || chīcihaicė || lāchīka || chīcændvāṭ
| 7 || '''chīka''' || chīcænde || chīcætām || chīcihaicē || chīkarvīm || chīcændvāṭ
|-
|-
! 8
! 8
| 8 || '''tītya''' || tītyendes || tītyamūh || tītihaicė || lātītya || tītyendvāṭ
| 8 || '''mbula''' || mbulende || mbulatām || mbulhaicē || mbularvīm || mbulendvāṭ
|-
|-
! 9
! 9
| 9 || '''moja''' || mojendes || mojmūh || mojihaicė || lāmoja || mojendvāṭ
| 9 || '''moja''' || mojende || mojatām || mojihaicē || mojarvīm || mojendvāṭ
|-
|-
! ᘔ
! ᘔ
| 10 || '''tålda''' || tåldendes || tåldamūh || tåldihaicė || lātålda || tåldendvāṭ
| 10 || '''tålda''' || tåldende || tåldatām || tåldihaicē || tåldarvīm || tåldendvāṭ
|-
|-
! Ɛ
! Ɛ
| 11 || '''vælden''' || vældindes || vældemūh || vældihaicė || lāvælden || vældindvāṭ
| 11 || '''vælden''' || vældinde || vælditām || vældihaicē || vældirvīm || vældindvāṭ
|-
|-
! 10
! 10
| 12 || '''māmei''' || māmindes || māmeimūh || māmeihaicė || lāmāmei || māmindvāṭ
| 12 || '''māmei''' || māminde || māmintām || māmeihaicē || māmairvīm || māmindvāṭ
|-
|-
! 11  
! 11  
| 13 || '''lelimaye''' || lelimayindes || lelimaimūh || lelimaihaicė || lālelimaye || lelimayindvāṭ
| 13 || '''emibumaye''' || emibumayinde || emibumaintām || emibumaihaicē || emibumairvīm || emibumayindvāṭ
|-
|-
! 12
! 12
| 14 || '''danimaye''' || danimayindes || danimaimūh || danimaihaicė || lādanimaye || danimayindvāṭ
| 14 || '''danimaye''' || danimayinde || danimaintām || danimaihaicē || danimairvim || danimayindvāṭ
|-
|-
! 13
! 13
| 15 || '''pamihælī''' || pamihælīndes || pamihælīmūh || pamihælīhaicė || lāpamihælī || pamihælīndvāṭ
| 15 || '''pamihælī''' || pamihælīnde || pamihælītām || pamihælīhaicē || pamihælīrvīm || pamihælīndvāṭ
|-
|-
! 14  
! 14  
| 16 || '''māmiyårṣe'''<br/><small>(-m, -h)</small> || māmiyårṣendes || māmiyårṣmūh || māmiyårṣhaicė || lāmāmiyårṣe || māmiyårṣendvāṭ
| 16 || '''māminęlte'''|| māminęltende || māminęltitām || māminęltehaicē || māminęltarvīm || māmiynęltendvāṭ
|-
|-
! 15
! 15
| 17 || '''māmifurḍe''' || māmifurḍendes || māmifurḍamūh || māmifurḍhaicė || lāmāmifurḍe || māmifurḍendvāṭ
| 17 || '''māmišulka''' || māmišulkende || māmišulkatām || māmišulkhaicē || māmišulkarvīm || māmišulkendvāṭ
|-
|-
! 16
! 16
| 18 || '''māmivælka''' || māmivælkendes || māmivælkamūh || māmivælkihaicė || lāmāmivælka || māmivælkendvāṭ
| 18 || '''māmivælka''' || māmivælkende || māmivælkatām || māmivælkihaicē || māmivælkarvīm || māmivælkendvāṭ
|-
|-
! 17
! 17
| 19 || '''māmichīka''' || māmichīcændes || māmichīkamūh || māmichīcihaicė || lāmāmichīka || māmichīcændvāṭ
| 19 || '''māmichīka''' || māmichīcænde || māmichīcætām || māmichīcihaicē || māmichīkarvīm || māmichīcændvāṭ
|-
|-
! 18
! 18
| 20 || '''māmitītya''' || māmitītyendes || māmitītyamūh || māmitītihaicė || lāmāmitītya || māmitītyendvāṭ
| 20 || '''māmimbula''' || māmimbulende || māmimbulyatām || māmimbulhaicē || māmimbularvīm || māmimbulendvāṭ
|-
|-
! 19
! 19
| 21 || '''māmimoja''' || māmimojendes || māmimojmūh || māmimojihaicė || lāmāmimoja || māmimojendvāṭ
| 21 || '''māmimoja''' || māmimojende || māmimojatām || māmimojihaicē || māmimojarvīm || māmimojendvāṭ
|-
|-
! 1ᘔ
! 1ᘔ
| 22 || '''māmitålda''' || māmitåldendes || māmitåldamūh || māmitåldihaicė || lāmāmitålda || māmitåldendvāṭ
| 22 || '''māmitålda''' || māmitåldende || māmitåldatām || māmitåldihaicē || māmitåldarvīm || māmitåldendvāṭ
|-
|-
! 1Ɛ
! 1Ɛ
| 23 || '''māmivælden''' || māmivældindes || māmivældemūh || māmivældihaicė || lāmāmivælden || māmivældindvāṭ
| 23 || '''māmivælden''' || māmivældinde || māmivælditām || māmivældihaicē || māmivældirvīm || māmivældindvāṭ
|-
|-
! 20
! 20
| 24 || '''hælьmāmei''' || hælьmāmindes || hælьmāmeimūh || hælьmāmeihaicė || lāhælьmāmei || hælьmāmindvāṭ
| 24 || '''hælmāmei''' || hælmāminde || hælmāmintām || hælmāmeihaicē || hælmāmairvīm || hælmāmindvāṭ
|}
|}
As for the two forms for one, ''emi'' is used in disjunctive counting (e.g. count-ins or countdowns) while ''emibe'' is used elsewhere. Compounds always have the full form, i.e. forms such as *hælmāmyemi do not exist.<br/>Some compound words, especially technical and scientific ones, use [[Lällshag]] morphemes for the quantities from 1 to ᘔ (though from 5 onwards they're rarer): ''mån-''&nbsp;1, ''yūn-''&nbsp;2, ''lyāš-''&nbsp;3, ''alan-''&nbsp;4, ''tamb-''&nbsp;5, ''jiruṇ-'' or ''ciruṇ-''&nbsp;6, ''tulyæn-''&nbsp;7, ''neim-''&nbsp;8, ''šid-''&nbsp;9, ''abar-''&nbsp;ᘔ.


Numbers from 20<sub>12</sub> above are simply made by compounding teens and units with the appropriate saṃdhi changes, like 21<sub>12</sub> <small>(25<sub>10</sub>)</small> ''hælьmāmileil'' (-um, -a), and then ''hælьmāmidani'' (-īm, īh), ''hælьmāmipāmvi'' (-m, -eh), and so on. Note that other compounds with 6 use -tulūʔa and not -vælka as in 16<sub>12</sub>.<br/>
Numbers from 20<sub>12</sub> above are simply made by compounding teens and units with the appropriate saṃdhi changes, like 21<sub>12</sub> <small>(25<sub>10</sub>)</small> ''hælmāmyemibe'', and then ''hælmāmidani'', ''hælmāmipāmvi'', and so on. Note that other compounds with 6 use -tulūɂa and not -vælka as in 16<sub>12</sub>.<br/>
The other teens are: '''30''' <small>(36<sub>10</sub>)</small> pāmvimāmei, '''40''' <small>(48<sub>10</sub>)</small> yårṣmāmei, '''50''' <small>(60<sub>10</sub>)</small> fūlmāmei, '''60''' <small>(72<sub>10</sub>)</small> vælknihæla, '''70''' <small>(84<sub>10</sub>)</small> māmyāvælka (regionally ''chīcæmāmei'', particularly in the East), '''80''' <small>(96<sub>10</sub>)</small> tītimāmei, '''90''' <small>(108<sub>10</sub>)</small> mojemāmei, '''ᘔ0''' <small>(120<sub>10</sub>)</small> tåldimāmei, '''Ɛ0''' <small>(132<sub>10</sub>)</small> māmimīram, and '''100''' nihæla.<br/>
The other dozens are:
The apparent irregularities in the words for 60<sub>12</sub>, 70<sub>12</sub>, and Ɛ0<sub>12</sub> are explained by etymology: ''vælka'' is the reflex of PLB *wewənko, which meant “half”, thus ''vælknihæla'' is “half hundred” and ''māmyāvælka'' is “twelve on half”; ''māmimīram'' is literally “twelve [less] from ahead”. 13<sub>12</sub> originally meant "one finger/three (''pāmvi'', the word for three, derives from ''pamih'', meaning "finger") in the second [dozen]", where the ''-hælī'' part is a worn form of ''hælinaikah''.
: '''30''' <small>(36<sub>10</sub>)</small> pāmvimāmei
: '''40''' <small>(48<sub>10</sub>)</small> nęltemāmei
: '''50''' <small>(60<sub>10</sub>)</small> šulkmāmei
: '''60''' <small>(72<sub>10</sub>)</small> vælknihæla
: '''70''' <small>(84<sub>10</sub>)</small> māmyāvælka (regionally ''chīcæmāmei'', particularly in the East)
: '''80''' <small>(96<sub>10</sub>)</small> mbulmāmei
: '''90''' <small>(108<sub>10</sub>)</small> mojemāmei
: '''ᘔ0''' <small>(120<sub>10</sub>)</small> tåldimāmei
: '''Ɛ0''' <small>(132<sub>10</sub>)</small> māmimīram
: and '''100''' <small>(144<sub>10</sub>)</small> nihæla.
The apparent irregularities in the words for 60<sub>12</sub>, 70<sub>12</sub>, and Ɛ0<sub>12</sub> are explained by etymology: ''vælka'' is the reflex of PLB *wewənko, which meant “half”, thus ''vælknihæla'' is “half hundred” and ''māmyāvælka'' is “twelve on half”; ''māmimīram'' is literally “twelve [less] from ahead”. 13<sub>12</sub> originally meant "one finger/three (''pāmvi'', the word for three, also meant "finger" in PLB (*pāmwəj) - whence also the Chlouvānem word for "finger", ''pamuvis'' (< PLB *pamwəjis)) in the second [dozen]", where the ''-hælī'' part is a worn form of ''hælinaika''.


Numbers from 100<sub>12</sub> to ƐƐƐ<sub>12</sub> are still compounds, e.g. nihælaleil, nihæladani, and so on. Note that 160<sub>12</sub> is most commonly nihæltulūʔa, but the more literary form nihælvælka may still be heard.<br/>
Numbers from 100<sub>12</sub> to ƐƐƐ<sub>12</sub> are still compounds, e.g. ''nihælaimibe'', ''nihæladani'', and so on. Note that 160<sub>12</sub> is most commonly ''nihæltulūɂa'', but the more literary form ''nihælvælka'' may still be heard.<br/>
The other hundreds are '''200''' <small>(288<sub>10</sub>)</small> daninihæla, '''300''' <small>(432<sub>10</sub>)</small>  pāmvinihæla, '''400''' <small>(576<sub>10</sub>)</small>  yårṣṇihæla, '''500''' <small>(720<sub>10</sub>)</small> furḍṇihæla, '''600''' <small>(864<sub>10</sub>)</small> tulūnihæla, '''700''' <small>(1008<sub>10</sub>)</small> chīcænihæla, '''800''' <small>(1152<sub>10</sub>)</small> tītinihæla, '''900''' <small>(1296<sub>10</sub>)</small> mojanihæla, '''ᘔ00''' <small>(1440<sub>10</sub>)</small> tåldanihæla, '''Ɛ00''' <small>(1584<sub>10</sub>)</small> vældenihæla.<br/>
The other dozenal hundreds are:
'''1.000''' <small>(1728<sub>10</sub>)</small> is ''tildhā'' and numbers above are separate words, without saṃdhi, e.g. '''6.2ᘔ9''' <small>(10785<sub>10</sub>)</small> ''tulūʔa tildhā daninihælatåldimāmimoja''.<br/>
: '''200''' <small>(288<sub>10</sub>)</small> daninihæla
Note that 2.000<sub>12</sub> may be either one of ''tildhādi'', ''danīh tildhā'', or (only emphatically) ''danīh tildhādi''. As ''tildhā'' is a parrot gender noun, 3.000<sub>12</sub> and 4.000<sub>12</sub> are respectively ''pāmveh tildhā'' and ''yårṣeh tildhā''.
: '''300''' <small>(432<sub>10</sub>)</small>  pāmvinihæla
: '''400''' <small>(576<sub>10</sub>)</small>  nęltenihæla
: '''500''' <small>(720<sub>10</sub>)</small> šulknihæla
: '''600''' <small>(864<sub>10</sub>)</small> tulūnihæla
: '''700''' <small>(1008<sub>10</sub>)</small> chīcænihæla
: '''800''' <small>(1152<sub>10</sub>)</small> mbulnihæla
: '''900''' <small>(1296<sub>10</sub>)</small> mojanihæla
: '''ᘔ00''' <small>(1440<sub>10</sub>)</small> tåldanihæla
: '''Ɛ00''' <small>(1584<sub>10</sub>)</small> vældenihæla.
'''1.000''' <small>(1728<sub>10</sub>)</small> is ''tildhā'' and numbers above are separate words, without saṃdhi, e.g. '''1.001''' ''tildhā emibe'', '''6.2ᘔ9''' <small>(10785<sub>10</sub>)</small> ''tulūɂa tildhā daninihælatåldimāmimoja''.<br/>
Note that 2.000<sub>12</sub> may be either one of ''tildhāt'', ''dani tildhā'', or (only emphatically) ''dani tildhāt''.


The other divisions - numbers over ƐƐ.ƐƐƐ<sub>12</sub> are based on groups of two digits: the two most commonly used ones in common speech are '''1.00.000''' <small>(248.832<sub>10</sub>)</small> - a ''raicė'' - and '''1.00.00.000''' <small>(35.831.808<sub>10</sub>)</small> - a ''lallaraicė''.  
The other divisions - numbers over ƐƐ.ƐƐƐ<sub>12</sub> are based on groups of two digits: the two most commonly used ones in common speech are '''1.00.000''' <small>(248.832<sub>10</sub>)</small> - a ''raicē'' - and '''1.00.00.000''' <small>(35.831.808<sub>10</sub>)</small> - a ''lallaraicē''.  


The next two groups have their separate words, but are quantities rarely used in common speech: '''1.00.00.00.000''' <small>(5.159.780.352<sub>10</sub>)</small> is a ''taiskaucis'' and '''1.00.00.00.00.000''' <small>(743.008.370.688<sub>10</sub>)</small> a ''lallataiskaucis''.
The next two groups have their separate words, but are quantities rarely used in common speech: '''1.00.00.00.000''' (12<sup>9</sup>) <small>(5.159.780.352<sub>10</sub>)</small> is a ''taiskaucis'' and '''1.00.00.00.00.000''' (12<sup>11</sup>) <small>(743.008.370.688<sub>10</sub>)</small> a ''lallataiskaucis''. The words ''khorādi'' (12<sup>7</sup>, i.e. synonym of lallaraicē), ''yaṣmūn'' (12<sup>11</sup>, i.e. lallataiskaucis), ''iriakas'' (12<sup>13</sup>), ''mairāṇa'' or ''lalleriakas'' (12<sup>15</sup>), ''nirāvah'' (12<sup>17</sup>), and ''sṝva'' or ''lallanirāvah'' (12<sup>19</sup>) were introduced in Classical-era texts, but are almost never used today. However, they form the base for the scientific measurement system's prefixes.


Their non-cardinal forms are all regular, with ''-endes'' (''-indes'' after ''-m'' or for Ɛ<sub>12</sub>) for ordinals, ''-mūh'' for collectives, ''-haicė'' for distributives, ''lā-'' for adverbials/multiplicatives, and ''-endvāṭ/-indvāṭ'' for the fractionaries. Compounds of 1-4 retain all irregularities (suppletive forms, gender), e.g. ''hælьmāmihælinaikas'' 22<sub>12</sub>nd (26<sub>10</sub>th).
Their non-cardinal forms are all regular, with ''-ende'' (''-inde'' after ''-m'' or for Ɛ<sub>12</sub>) for ordinals, ''-tām'' for collectives, ''-haicē'' for distributives, ''-rvīm'' for adverbials/multiplicatives (prefixed ''māg-'' for the separate adverbial forms), and ''-endvāṭ/-indvāṭ'' for the fractionaries. Compounds of 1-2 retain all irregular suppletive forms, e.g. ''hælmāmilahīla'' 21<sub>12</sub>st (25<sub>10</sub>th); ''hælmāmihælinaika'' 22<sub>12</sub>nd (26<sub>10</sub>th).


=== Using numerals ===
Finally, there are few other cardinals commonly used in speech: ''vālhælya'' 1½, ''vālpāmvya'' 2½, ''vālnęlca'' 3½, ''vālšulca'' 4½, and ''vāltulūya'' 5½. The forms ''vālchīca'', ''vālambulya'' (or ''vālumbulya''), and ''vālmojya'' are used in telling the time only and obsolete otherwise, while other similar forms are sparingly attested in older mathematical texts, but periphrastical constructions such as ''tulūɂa hælinaivāṭ no'' (or, sometimes, ''- vælka no'') are more commonly heard and used nowadays. A form that, however, is sometimes found up to the present day is ''vālhælnihæla'', meaning 160<sub>12</sub> (216<sub>10</sub>), i.e. one dozenal hundred and a half.
Cardinal numerals may be used in two ways, depending on whether emphasis is given to the number or to the thing counted.
* In the most common use, the counted thing is emphasized: the numeral is put '''before''' the noun and the noun is always '''singular''' (except for "two", see below) plus the appropriate case: e.g. ''leilum yujam'' (a lotus flower); ''danīh māra'' (two mango fruits); ''pāmvi haloe'' (three names), ''vælden ñaiṭa'' (eleven stars), and so on.
* If emphasis is given to the number, then the counted thing comes first, and, if it should be in direct, ergative, or accusative case, it is in '''genitive singular''' instead; the semantic direct, ergative, or accusative case is taken by the numeral itself if it is one, two, three, or compounds. Examples: ''yujami leilum'' (one lotus flower), ''māri danīh'' (two mango fruits), ''halenies pāmvi'' (three names), ''ñaiṭi vælden'' (eleven stars). In other cases, the noun follows the semantic case (but is always singular anyway), e.g. ''marti pāmveh'' (three cities) but ''marte pāmviye'' (in the three cities).<br/>This form is increasingly less common in everyday use.
* "Two" may be used with either singular or dual number: ''danīh māra'' or ''māri danīh'' are both as correct as ''danīh māradi'' and ''māradais danīh'' - note that the dual number alone, without the numeral, has the same meaning. Outside of literary texts, it is however more common to specify "two" with the numeral.


Ordinals, collectives, and multiplicatives are simply used as declinable adjectives, but collectives and multiplicatives are always singular (optionally dual for ''daniamūh'' and ''lādani''). e.g. ''hælinaikah kita'' "second house", ''tītyamūh lejīn'' "all eight singers", ''lāpāmvi yąloe'' "triple meal/a meal three times as large". Bare multiplicatives may carry either the meaning of "repeated X times" or "X times as large", but the latter is most commonly specified with a comparison (''en'') or by context.<br/>
====Use of fractionary numbers====
Collectives are often used with the meaning of "all X of..." - e.g. ''tītyamūh lejīn dilu liju lilejlāyonaça'' "all eight singers wanted to sing the same song" -, with the meaning of "X sets of" with pluralia and singularia tantum, e.g. ''pāmvimūh hærṣūs'' "three pairs of lips" (note that colloquial Chlouvānem increasingly often uses the cardinals here, e.g. ''pāmvi hærṣūs''), and with people and animals in order to say "a group of X", taken as a single entity: there can be subtle differences in meaning, e.g. ''chīka lalāruṇa tugęnça'' (with a cardinal) and ''chīkamūh lalāruṇa tugęnça'' (with a collective) both mean "seven ''lalāruṇai'' hit", but in the latter sentence the action it is implied to be a coordinate act of all seven animals, while in the former they either hit randomly or the coordination of the action is not specified (or not specification-worthy).
Fractionary numbers (except ''vāl-'' ones) are used to express non-integers just like any other quantity. Simple ones such as 0,6 (½) are the basic fractionary number - in this case ''hælinaivāṭ'' (note that, outside mathematics, ''danyāmita'' is the preferred term for "half", both in metaphorical (''lilyā viṣam danyāmita'' "my other half") and non-metaphorical uses (''alāvi danyāmita'' "half of the bottle")); other examples are 0,3 (¼) ''nęltendvāṭ'' and 0,4 (⅓) ''pāmvendvāṭ''.<br/>
With more complex fractions, the smallest part (negative power of twelve) is stated - the three commonly found are 1/12 (''māmindvāṭ''), 1/144 (''nihælendvāṭ''), and 1/1728 (''tildhaindvāṭ''). For example, 0,82 is ''mbulmāmidani nihælendvāṭ'' and 0,7ᘔ6 is ''chīcænihælamāmimīraṃtulūɂa tildhaindvāṭ''; sometimes, "0, then" (mīram) may be added: ''ajrā mīram mbulmāmidani nihælendvāṭ''.


Distributives are indeclinable adjectives, and have the meaning of "X each": ''pāmvihaicė titė męlyąt'' "three pens each are given"; ''lili liliā ñæltah no tulūʔihaicė kolecañi alau ulgutamiaça'' "my sister and I have bought six bottles of kvas each" — note in both sentences the use of singular number in ''titė'' (pencil) and ''alūs'' (gen. ''alau'') "bottle".
With a non-fractionary portion that is not zero, instead of ''mīram'', ''smurā'' (full, integer) is used - e.g. 2,307 is usually said as ''dani smurā pāmvinihælchīka tildhaindvāṭ''.


Fractionary numerals are always used in the noun.<small>GEN</small> numeral construction, and they are invariable in direct, vocative, accusative, and ergative case but decline with ''-vaḍa'' in all of the others (in fact, etymologically they derive from worn down forms of ordinal + ''vaḍa'', meaning Xth part, e.g. ''hælinaikah vaḍa'' (the second part) → ''hælinaivāṭ''). Unlike ordinals, the noun is always in the genitive case. Examples: ''marti hælinaivāṭ'' "half of the city" ; ''alāvi yårṣendvāṭ'' "one fourth of the bottle" ; ''bhæli tulūʔendvaḍe'' "in one sixth of the country".
====Declensions of cardinal numbers====
Some cardinal numbers are declined for case, but this is usually only done in formal Chlouvānem. In informal Chlouvānem, either only ''emibe'' is declined, or are all numerals up to ''vælden'', plus ''nihæla''. Compounds of these are usually not declined. The words ''tildhā'', ''(lalla)raicē'', and ''(lalla)taiskaucis'' are always declined, but they are fully nouns.
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
! rowspan=2 | Case !! rowspan=2 | ''emibe'' !! Dual paradigm !! i-paradigm !! a-paradigm !! en-paradigm
|-
! <small>''dani''</small> !! ''pāmvi'', ''nęlte''</small><ref>''nęlte'' has the stem ''nęlc-'' wherever ''pāmvi'' has ''-vy-'', i.e. accusatives ''pāmvyu, nęlcu''.</ref> !! <small>5 to 10<ref>''chīka'' has the stem ''chīcæ-'' before consonants.</ref></small> !! <small>''vælden'' only</small>
|-
! Direct<br/>Vocative
| '''emibe''' || '''dani''' || '''pāmvi''' || '''šulka''' || '''vælden'''
|-
! Accusative
| emiyu || daneṣa || pāmvyu || šulku || vældu
|-
! Ergative
| emeis || daneya || pāmvyes || šulkes || vældes
|-
! Genitive
| emibī || dañva || pāmvi<ref>''nęlte'' has the form ''nęlci''.</ref> || šulki || vældi
|-
! Translative
| emiban || danaus || pāmvin || šulkan || vældanna
|-
! Exessive
| emibat || danebhan || pāmvit || šulkat || vældanta
|-
! Essive
| emibą || danīgin || pāmvyą || šulką || vældąs
|-
! Dative
| emibå || danaus || pāmvyå || šulkå || vældå
|-
! Ablative
| emiyų || danebhan || pāmvyų || šulkų || vældų
|-
! Locative
| emiye || danīgin || pāmvye || šulke || vælde
|-
! Instrumental
| emīp || danebhan || pāmvip || šulkip || vældampa
|}
 
=== Use of numerals===
'''Cardinal numerals''' may be used in two ways, depending on whether emphasis is given to the number or to the thing counted.
* In the most common use, the counted thing is emphasized: the numeral is put '''before''' the noun and the noun is always '''singular''' (except for "two", see below) plus the appropriate case: e.g. ''emibe yujam'' (one lotus flower); ''dani māra'' (two mango fruits); ''pāmvi haloe'' (three names), ''vælden ñaiṭa'' (eleven stars), and so on.
* If emphasis is given to the number, then the counted thing comes first, and, if it should be in direct, ergative, or accusative case, it is in '''genitive singular''' instead; the semantic direct, ergative, or accusative case is taken by the numeral itself if it is one, two, three, or compounds. Examples: ''yujami emibe'' (one lotus flower), ''māri dani'' (two mango fruits), ''haleni pāmvi'' (three names), ''ñaiṭi vælden'' (eleven stars). In other cases, the noun follows the semantic case (but is always singular anyway), e.g. ''marti pāmvi'' (three cities) but ''marte pāmvye'' (in the three cities).<br/>This form is increasingly less common in everyday use.
* "Two" may be used with either singular or dual number: ''dani māra'' or ''māri dani'' are both as correct as ''dani mārāt'' and ''māreva dani'' - note that the dual number alone, without the numeral, has the same meaning; the dual form alone does not give particular emphasis to the number, while using the numeral, at least in formal styles, already gives more emphasis (intermediate to the two abovementioned forms). Outside of literary texts, it is however more common to specify "two" with the numeral.
 
Note, though, the structure "''nihæle'' + genitive of a noun + a cardinal numeral", used for expressing percentage (dozenally), e.g. ''nihæle laili hælmāmei'' "20% of people".
 
'''Ordinal numerals''' are regular attributive adjective-like words that precede nouns - e.g. ''hælinaika kita'' "second house". They do not decline if are used together with a noun, but they can also be used alone (e.g. ''hælinaika'' "the second one"), in which case they decline for case and number, as if they were ''-eh'' nouns (''-a'' for 1st and 2nd), e.g. ''mojendesām ukulate'' "it has been told to those in ninth position".
 
'''Collective numerals''' (which decline as regular ''-ām'' nouns) are most commonly found with the meaning of "a group consisting of X ...", therefore implying greater cohesiveness than using the cardinal number implies. A common example of the subtle meaning change is between the sentences ''chīka lalāruṇa togāhaite'' (with a cardinal) and ''chīcætām lalāruṇa togāhaite'' (with a collective): both mean "seven ''lalāruṇai'' hit", but in the latter sentence the action is implied to be a coordinate act of all seven animals, while in the former they either hit randomly or the coordination of the action is not specified (or not specification-worthy). This is also the most common meaning with pluralia tantum, as commonly heard with ethnonyms (which are all plural only in Chlouvānem), e.g. ''šulkatām chlǣvānem'' "[a group of] five Chlouvānem people".<br/>
They can also be found, context-dependent, used with the meaning of "all X of..." - in a sentence such as e.g. ''mbulatām lejīn dilu liju lilejlaikate'' "all eight singers wanted to sing the same song" - or with the meaning of "X sets of" with singularia tantum - e.g. ''pāmvyatām hærṣūs'' "three pairs of lips" (but note that colloquial Chlouvānem increasingly often uses the cardinals here, e.g. ''pāmvi hærṣūs'').<br/>
The collective numerals for 0 and 1 (''ajrāṇṭām'' and ''emibutām'' respectively) are not included in the table above because they do not exist in practical use; however, they are sporadically found in poetry and literature, referring to people and with the meaning of "a group where only one/no one is ...", e.g. ''ajrāṇṭām tadhusmausīn'' "a group where no one is honest". Similarly, collectives for ''vāl-'' numbers (e.g. ''vālpāmvyantām'' "a group consisting of 2½ ...") exist, but are virtually unused. ''danyatām'', like ''dani'', may be use together with either a singular or a dual noun.
 
In some cases, the choice between a collective and a cardinal is stylistic. While for example concepts such as "we are..." or "I have ... children" do normally use the collective (e.g. ''tulūɂatām ñæltah jalim'' "we are six sisters/a group of six reciprocal brothers and sisters"; ''lili mæn nęltitām nūrya'' "I have four children"), even if using a cardinal isn't wrong, in a sentence such as "there are X people" both versions are found, with the collective-using sentence (e.g. ''dvārma vælditāmą lilęs virā'' "in the room there are eleven people") being perceived as more formal than the more colloquially heard cardinal-using version (i.e. ''dvārma vældąs lilęs virā'').
 
'''Distributive numerals''' are indeclinable adjective-like words, and have the meaning of "X each": ''pāmvihaicē titē męlyāhai'' "three pens each are given"; ''lili lilyā ñæltah no tulūɂihaicē karjhañī alau ulgutarate'' "my sister and I have bought six bottles of kvas each" — note in both sentences the use of singular number in ''titē'' (pencil) and ''alūs'' (acc. ''alau'') "bottle", just like after cardinal and collective numerals.
 
'''Adverbial numerals''' are adverbs with the meaning of "X times" and '''multiplicative numbers''' are adjective-like words (that can also be used alone) with the meaning of "X times as large"; numbers from 1 to 4 have both forms, while all other ones (except 0) have only the multiplicative one, which is used for both meanings. Examples: ''pāmvirvīm yąloe'' "triple meal/a meal three times as large"; ''āsena māgdani'' "twice a month"; ''āsena mbularvīm'' "eight times a month".<br/>
Zero only has an adverbial form (''māgajrā''), which is however only used in reading multiplications and powers, e.g. 3 * 0 ''māgajrā pāmvi'', 9<sup>0</sup> ''māgajrā demǣ moja''.


==Particles==
'''Fractionary numerals''' are always used in the noun.<small>GEN</small> numeral construction, and they are invariable in direct, vocative, accusative, and ergative case but decline with ''-vaḍa'' in all of the others (in fact, etymologically they derive from worn down forms of ordinal + ''vaḍa'', meaning Xth part, e.g. ''hælinaika vaḍa'' (the second part) → ''hælinaivāṭ''). Unlike ordinals, the noun is always in the genitive case. Examples: ''marti hælinaivāṭ'' "half of the city" ; ''alāvi nęltendvāṭ'' "one fourth of the bottle" ; ''babhrāmi tulūɂendvaḍe'' "in one sixth of the country".
The numerous particles in the Chlouvānem language have various uses, including coordinating conjunctions, semantic, and pragmatic particles. Most of them (except a few conjunctions) follow the word they modify. Here they are listed in Latin alphabetical order:
* '''e''' translates "like"; it requires essive case with nouns (in formal speech; while bare essive most properly has the meaning "as X" instead of "like X", colloquially it is used both ways) and subjunctive mood with realis verbs (other moods are used for their meaning).
* '''en''' usually requires accusative case and translates to English "than" in comparisons.
* '''eri''' means "even", marking a positive emphasis and used with positive sentences (e.g. ''hūnakumi dældān eri dældire'' "(s)he even speaks Hūnakumi<ref>Language of an ethnic minority (but titular ethnicity) in the diocese of Hūnakañjātia.</ref>")
* '''fras''' marks the antibenefactive argument outside of antibenefactive-trigger voice, or "to avoid X" with a subjunctive mood verb.
* '''ga''' is an adpositive particle, used to join nouns in noun phrases (usually titles; the only exceptions being honorifics), such as ''Līlasuṃghāṇa ga marta'' (Līlasuṃghāṇa city, or "city of Līlasuṃghāṇa") or ''Tāllahāria ga maita'' (Tāllahāria river).
* '''gāri''' means "not even", being the opposite of ''eri'', marking a negative emphasis in negative sentences (e.g. ''chāra chlouvānumi dældān gāri gu dældire ša'' "(s)he doesn't even speak correct Chlouvānem")
* '''golat''' translates "meanwhile" or "on the other hand".
* '''gu(n) — ša''' is a circumfix around verbs used to negate it, e.g. ''gu yuyųlsėça ša'' "(s)he doesn't want to eat").
* '''laha''' means "only, just", e.g. ''lārvājuṣui laha flå'' "I'm only going to the temple".
* '''lapi''' means "with"; when used in instrumental sense it requires ergative case, while the comitative sense requires the essive.
* '''leah''' translates "already", with a noun in essive case or a verb in the semantically correct mood.
* '''mbu''' means "or"; placement with nouns is the same as ''no''/''çei'', and with verbs it's often the same as ''sama''.
* '''mei''' and '''go''' are the Chlouvānem words for "yes" and "no" respectively; their use is however different from English, as they are used according to the polarity of the question: ''mei'' answers "yes" to affirmative questions and "no" to negative questions; ''go'' answers "no" to affirmative questions and "yes" to negative questions.
* '''menni''' translates "because, for". If there's a following main clause, then it's the last word in the subordinate of reason (this use is synonymous to the consequential secondary verbal mood of cause); if it's a lone sentence (an answer), then it is usually at the ''second'' place in the sentence, after the verbal trigger (e.g. ''tami menni yuyųlsėça'' "because (s)he wants to eat").
* '''mūji''' translates "almost", "more or less"
* '''mæn''' [[Chlouvānem#Use of the topic|marks the topic]] which otherwise has no role in the sentence (often used inside larger conversations, e.g. ''lili mæn yulte kåmbe'' (mine/as for me (echoing a previous sentence), [it is] in the bright yellow backpack; OR: as for me, [I keep it] in...)).
* '''najinai''' means "maybe"; it stems from the archaic potential form of ''najake'' (to happen). It requires a verb in subjunctive mood.
* '''nali''', when used with a noun in direct case, marks the benefactive argument in any voice except benefactive-trigger. When used with a verb in subjunctive mood, it means "in order to", with a nuance of hope (when compared to the bare subjunctive, which already has that meaning).
* '''nānim''' translates "almost", with a noun in essive case or a verb in the semantically correct mood.
* '''natte''' translates "until", with a noun in translative case (or dative case for places, meaning "as far as")<ref>Compare ''ājvan natte'' "until dawn" and ''līlasuṃghāṇa kahėrimaila ga keikui natte'' "as far as Līlasuṃghāṇa Kahėrimaila Station".</ref> or a verb in the subjunctive.
* '''ni''' translates "but" as a coordinating conjunction.
* '''no''' translates English "and" when between nouns and when denoting a complete listing; for incomplete listings (e.g. "X and Y and so on") the particle '''çei''' is used. Both follow the noun they refer to, and in listings with more than two nouns they follow every noun except the first. They can also translate "and" between verbs, but ''sama'' is preferred between sentences, especially with different subjects (e.g. ''yąluça moluça no'' "I eat and drink", either ''mėlitu yąluça kolecañu moluça no'' or ''mėlitu yąluça sama kolecañu moluça'' "I eat curry and drink kvas", but most often ''mėlitu yąluça sama liliā ñæltah kolecañu molėça'' "I eat curry and my sister drinks kvas". Note that ''mėlitu yąluça liliā ñæltah kolecañu molėça no'' is still correct, but mostly found in literary or very formal language).
* '''pa''' translates "on, of, about; concerning, on the subject of", and requires a noun direct case or a verb in subjunctive mood.
* '''sama''' translates "and" as a coordinating conjunction between clauses. If the following word starts with a vowel, it is shortened to '''sam''''.
* '''tī''' translates "because", "for", and it is always in the second clause of a sentence: ''dadrāṃçå tī daudiau'' "I have done it because I wanted to".
* '''tora''' translates "also", "too", usually before the verb (e.g. ''tora uyųlaṃçå'' "I've eaten that too"); note that "also" as a conjunction between two sentences is usually translated with ''nanū'' (more).
** '''tora gu''' is a particle-adjective locution translating "not even", and is put before the noun it refers to;
** '''tora no''', after the noun, translates "even" - e.g. ''tami tora no dadrāçå'' "even he has done it it").
* '''tælū''' means "again".
* '''væse''' translates "while", "meanwhile", with an essive (or, depending on meaning, exessive or translative) noun or a verb of the semantically correct mood.


===Adjectival-adverbial particles===
===Basic maths===
Adjectival-adverbial particles are those particles that have are semantically adjectives or adverbs identifying quantity, but - like particles - usually follow the noun or the verb they refer to instead of preceding it.
* 1 + 2 = 3
* '''glidemæh''' translates "only" or "alone".
: emibe ''širē'' dani pāmvyå ''lunade'' (1.<small>DIR</small>. more. 2.<small>DIR</small>. 3-<small>DAT</small>. go.<small>MONODIR-IND.PRES-3DU.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE</small>) — rule: A<sup>DIR</sup> ''širē'' B<sup>DIR</sup> (''širē'' ...) C<sup>DAT</sup> ''lunade'' (two addends) / ''lunāhai'' (3+ addends)
* '''maifu''' translates "enough".
* 3 - 2 = 1
* '''udvī''' translates "without"; it requires a noun in essive case or a verb in subjunctive mood.
: pāmvi ''isan'' dani emibå ''lunade'' (3.<small>DIR</small>. minus. 2.<small>DIR</small>. 1-<small>DAT</small> go.<small>MONODIR-IND.PRES-3DU.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE</small>) — rule: A<sup>DIR</sup> ''isan'' B<sup>DIR</sup> (''isan'' ...) C<sup>DAT</sup> ''lunade'' (two addends) / ''lunāhai'' (3+ addends)
* 3 * 2 = 6
: ''māgdani'' pāmvi tulūɂå ''liven'' (2.<small>ADV.MULTIP</small>. 3.<small>DIR</small>. 6-<small>DAT</small>. go.<small>MONODIR-IND.PRES-3SG.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE</small>) — rule: <small>MULTIPLICATIVE.(ADV)-</small>B A<sup>DIR</sup> C<sup>DAT</sup> ''liven''
* 6 : 2 = 3
: ''hælinaivadęs'' tulūɂa pāmvyå ''liven'' (2.<small>FRACTION-ESS</small>. 6.<small>DIR</small> 3-<small>DAT</small>. go.<small>MONODIR-IND.PRES-3SG.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE</small>) — rule: <small>FRACTIONARY-</small>B<sup>ESS</sup> A<sup>DIR</sup> C<sup>DAT</sup> ''liven''
* 6<sup>2</sup> = 30 (36<sub>10</sub>)
: ''māgdani demǣ'' tulūɂa pāmvimāmei ''liven'' (2.<small>ADV.MULTIP</small>. <small>REFL.GEN-LOC</small>. 6.<small>DIR</small>. 30<sub>12</sub>. go.<small>MONODIR-IND.PRES-3SG.EXTERIOR-AGENTIVE</small>) — rule: <small>MULTIPLICATIVE.(ADV)-</small>B ''demǣ'' A<sup>DIR</sup> C<sup>DAT</sup> ''liven''


===Paired particles===
===Reified numerals===
The paired particles in Chlouvānem are:
Reified numerals, or numerals used as nouns, have a special form, which is actually the numeral with the common noun-forming suffix ''-as'' added (with regular saṃdhi). These numerals are used most notably for:
* '''gu''' X '''tora gu''' Y '''no''' — translating "neither X nor Y"; e.g. ''gu jādāh tora gu lañekaica no drāyonaçå'' "neither Jādāh nor Lañekaica did it".
* In order to refer to the digits themselves (''danyas'' "the digit 2");
* X '''jusęe''' Y '''mbu''' — translating "either X or Y". ''jusęe'' is a worn-down form of ''jususęe'', adverb form of ''jususas'', present participle of ''gyake'' (to be). e.g. ''jādāh jusęe lañekaica mbu drāyonaçå'' "either Jādāh or Lañekaica did it".
* Things named with numbers (''tulūɂās'' "[tram/bus/etc] number 6");
* X '''jusęe''' Y '''tora no''' — translating "both X and Y"; e.g. ''jādāh jusęe lañekaica tora no drāyonaçå'' "both Jādāh and Lañekaica did it".
* <small>''(in the plural)''</small> Year dozens (''vælknihælē'' "the 60<sub>12</sub>s = the 3860<sub>12</sub>s);
* <small>''(in the plural)''</small> Age ranges by the dozen (''hælmāmeyē'' "20<sub>12</sub>ies" = the age range from the start of one's 20<sub>12</sub>th year to the end of one's 2Ɛth);
* School marks - note that there's no uniform system in the Inquisition (''nęltayas'' "a grade 4" (passing grade in the most widespread system for non-higher education in the Inquisition, ranging from 1 (''emibayas''), worst, to 7 (''chīkās''), best));
* A group of X people - a reification of collective numerals (''pāmvyas'' "a trio").
 
Note that there are some terms which use numerals as roots but aren't considered reified numbers (also because of their rather inconsistent meanings); the most common examples include ''danyāmita'' (half) and ''māmyāmita'' (dozen).
 
===Units of Measurement===
Chlouvānem units of measurement (''lęlgīs'', pl. ''lęlgais'') are divided in popular units (''leilausirena lęlgais'') and scientific units (''tarlausirena lęlgais''). Scientific units, while understood, are rarely found outside of scientific contexts if corresponding popular units exist, while popular units are found in daily usage. Popular units follow however a measurement standard introduced in the year 36Ɛ7 <small>(6187<sub>10</sub>)</small> and updated several times in the following two centuries, in order to give a single understood measure for all units whose names and definitions varied across the many countries of the Chlouvānem cultural space.<br/>It is also to be noted that Calemerian scientific units have internationally unified definitions for their base units but are substantially different between the Western and the Eastern world as Western countries use them with a decimal system, while the Eastern countries (the Inquisition, most of the former Kaiṣamā, and Greater Skyrdagor) use them with a duodecimal system.
 
====Length====
The ''tyuta'', ''nakūrum'', and ''garaṇa'' are known but rarely used; the ''vālpāmvyās'' is rarely written as a separate measure, but isn't uncommon in speech.
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
! Short !! Name !! Meaning/name origin !! Equivalent to !! Metric system (approx.)
|-
! lūj
| lūjla <small>(ABL)</small> || <small>Point, tip</small> || ⅛ tyu || ~3.09639 mm
|-
! tyu
| tyuta || <small>Short (dialectal)</small> || ⅓ ka || ~2.47711 cm
|-
! ka
| katis || <small>Finger</small> || ⅓ mā || ~7.43133 cm
|-
! mā
| '''mākoba''' || <small>Span</small> || ''(base unit)'' || 22.294 cm
|-
|-
! pā
| pājya || <small>Leg</small> || 4 mā || 89.176 cm
|-
! vāl
| vālpāmvyās<br/>vālpāmvya pājya || <small>Two and a half legs</small> || 2+½ pā || 2.2294 m
|-
! nak
| nakūrum || <small>Rod</small> || 8 pā || 7.13408 m
|-
! cān
| cāṃtrūh || <small>Section (A. Yodhvaši)</small> || 140 (192<sub>10</sub>) pā || 171.21792 m
|-
! vai
| vaiṣrya || <small>Plough</small> || 8 cān<br/>ᘔ80 <small>(1536<sub>10</sub>)</small> pā || 1369.7434 m — 1.36974 km
|-
! gar
| garaṇa || <small>Hour</small> || 34 <small>(40<sub>10</sub>)</small> cān || 6848.72 m — 6.84872 km
|}
 
<!-- ====Area====
The ''våṇṭa'' may or may not be written as a separate measure. A measure of 1 ''jāṇa'' and 700 ''dvāmāryai'' may be written as ''1 jā.700 (dvā)'' (most commonly) or as ''1 jā.1.100 (dvā)''.
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
! Short !! Name !! Meaning/name origin !! Equivalent to !! Metric system (approx.)
|-
! sǣ
| sǣca || <small>Small, Piece (in A.Namaikehi)</small> || 1 nī * 1 nī || 51.95 cm<sup>2</sup>
|-
! dar
| daryā || <small>unknown; name first used in the Near East</small> || 60 <small>(72<sub>10</sub>)</small> sǣ || 3,740.4 cm<sup>2</sup>
|-
! re
| relya || <small>Carpet</small> || 3 dar || ~1.12212 m<sup>2</sup>
|-
! dvā
| dvāmārya || <small>ultimately from ''dvārma'' (room)</small> || 4 re || ~4.48848 m<sup>2</sup>
|-
! vå
| våṇṭa || <small>probably from a Tamukāyi word meaning "fence(d)"</small> || 600 <small>(864<sub>10</sub>)</small> dvā — ½ jā || ~3,878.0467 m<sup>2</sup>
|-
! jā
| jāṇa || <small>Field</small> || 1,000 <small>(1,728<sub>10</sub>)</small> do — 2 vå || ~7,756.0934 m<sup>2</sup>
|-
! e
| ekram || <small>Expanse (in A.Namaikehi)</small> || 100 <small>(144<sub>10</sub>)</small> jā || ~1.1168 km<sup>2</sup>
|}
 
====Weight (and mass)====
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
! Short !! Name !! Meaning/name origin !! Equivalent to !! Metric system (approx.)
|-
! vaj
| vaji || <small>dimin. from ''vaḍa'' (part)</small> || 1/100 <small>(1/144<sub>10</sub>)</small> dū || ~51.79398 mg
|-
! dū
| dūdha || <small>Seed</small> || ⅙ lit || ~7.45833 g
|-
! lit
| litveh || <small>Cut (in A.Namaikehi)</small> || ¼ aut || 44.75 g
|-
! aut
| '''auṭikā''' || <small>probably an augmentative from PLB *wutərus<ref>cf. ''ūtarṇ-'' "heavy" and ''ūṭrus'' "load"</ref></small> || ''(base unit)'' || 179 g
|-
! tū
| tulūɂendā || <small>ultimately from ''tulūɂendes'' (sixth)</small> || 6 aut || 1,074 g
|-
! pau
| paurā || <small>Rock (dialectal)</small> || 70 <small>(84<sub>10</sub>)</small> aut || 12.53 kg
|-
! māp
| māmipaurā || <small>''māmei'' (twelve) + ''paurā''</small> || 10 <small>(12<sub>10</sub>)</small> pau || 150.36 kg
|-
! lap
| lallapaurā || <small>''lalla'' (high, further) + ''paurā''</small> || 10 <small>(12<sub>10</sub>)</small> māp || 1,804.32 kg
|}
 
====Volume====
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
! Short !! Name !! Meaning/name origin !! Equivalent to !! Metric system (approx.)
|-
! src
| ṣærcañīh || <small>dimin. from ''ṣarus'' (spoon)</small> || ½ ṣar || ~5.78704 mL
|-
! ṣar
| ṣarus || <small>Spoon</small> || ⅓ cel || ~11.57407 mL
|-
! cel
| celya || <small>Small glass</small> || ⅙ lun || ~34.72222 mL
|-
! lun
| luneyāvi || <small>from ''lunai'' (tea)</small> || ⅓ val || ~0.20833 L
|-
! val
| '''valdhēna''' || <small>Flagon</small> || ''(base unit)''  || 0.625 L
|-
! al
| alūs || <small>Bottle</small> || 2+ ⅓ val || ~1.45833 L
|-
! då
| dåṣṭis || <small>Bucket</small> || 8 al || ~11.66666 L
|-
! raš
| rašah || <small>Barrel</small> || 16 <small>(18<sub>10</sub>)</small> då || ~210 L
|}
 
There are also two further units for dry measures only:
* the ''purṣa'' ("pot", '''pur'''), equivalent to 1+½ val (~0.9375 L);
* the ''ręnah'' ("jar, urn", '''rę'''), equivalent to 6 pur (~5.625 L).
 
The ''egimbladuldāvi'' (egd) is a unit used for measuring engine displacement: 1 egd equals ⅙ val, that is ~0.10416667 L (~104.16667 cc). -->
 
====Temperature====
Temperature measuring in the Chlouvānem world uses the ''Jahārāṭha'' scale (shortened '''ºj'''; named after scientist Ṣastirāvi Jahārāṭha ''Nukthalin''), which is fixed with a zero degree at water freezing temperature at sea level. 100 ºj is the rough boiling temperature of water, but, being a duodecimal scale, it is 100<sub>12</sub> (144<sub>10</sub>), thus 1 ºj equals 25/36 of a degree Celsius, or 1 ºC = 1.44 ºj.<br/>The median body temperature of a Calemerian human (which is slightly lower than for terrestrial humans) is of 41 ºj <small>(49<sub>10</sub>)</small>, thus  ~34.0278 ºC.
 
====Time====
→ ''See also: [[Chlouvānem/Calendar_and_time#The_Chlouvānem_calendar|Chlouvānem Calendar and time § the Chlouvānem calendar]]
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
! English !! Chlouvānem !! Equivalent to !! rough Earthly approximation
|-
! Year
| heirah || 418 Calemerian days || 609.6 Earth days
|-
! Day
| lairē || 28<sub>12</sub> (32<sub>10</sub>) hours || ~35 hours
|-
! Hour
| garaṇa || 3 hælmāmyai<br/>60<sub>12</sub> (72<sub>10</sub>) railai || ~65 min ~37 sec
|-
! <small>''group of "minutes"''</small>
| hælmāmya || 20<sub>12</sub> (24<sub>10</sub>) railai || ~21 min ~52 sec
|-
! "Minute"
| raila || ''(base unit)''  || ~54.6805 sec
|-
! "Second"
| namišoe || 1/40<sub>12</sub> (1/48<sub>10</sub>) raila  || ~1.8986 sec
|-
! <small>1/12 of a "second"</small>
| (namišeni) māmendvāṭ || 1/10<sub>12</sub> (1/12<sub>10</sub>) namišoe || ~0.1582 sec
|-
! <small>1/144 of a "second"</small>
| (namišeni) nihælendvāṭ || 1/100<sub>12</sub> (1/144<sub>10</sub>) namišoe || ~0.0131 sec
|-
! <small>1/1728 of a "second"</small>
| (namišeni) tildhaindvāṭ || 1/1000<sub>12</sub> (1/1728<sub>10</sub>) namišoe || ~1.0987 ms
|}
 
====Other units====
{| class="redtable lightredbg"
|-
! !! Chlouvānem !! Symbol !! rough Earthly approximation
|-
! frequency
| lūnaji || lnj || ~0.526704 Hz
|-
! voltage
| chulgān || chg || 1 V
|}
 
==Particles (''remīk'')==
Traditional Chlouvānem grammar only recognizes a single part of speech called "particles" (''remīn'', literally "helper(s)") which includes conjunctions, postpositions, and interjections. However, these three are recognized as subsets of particles - here translated as "conjunctive particles" (''natemālāhai remīn''), "accompanying particles", i.e. postpositions (''ūtimāhai remīn''), and "exclamatory particles" (''pigdilanah nali remīn'').
 
Many Chlouvānem particles are grammaticalized usages of other words, some of them no longer being used in their original meaning in contemporary use (e.g. ''varve'').
 
===Conjunctive particles===
Conjunctive particles may not stand syntactically alone and, with a few exceptions, don't require any particular case of a noun. Most of them function, or are also used, as conjunctions between sentences.
 
* '''jahān''' — anyway (conjunction or second position adverb)
* '''lai''' — inclusive or
* '''las''' — and (in incomplete listings, cf. ''no'' and ''sama''); it follows the noun it refers to, and in listings with more than two nouns it follows every noun except for the first. Not used to conjoin sentences.
* '''lenta''' — "together (with)", adverbial or postpositive, requiring genitive case in the latter usage. When pospositive, it is more emphatic than ''lā''. Adverbially, ''gimmālsiṭ'' is more common.
* '''mailiven''' — so, thus, therefore (grammaticalized use of <small>go_forward.UNIDIR.PRES.IND.EXP.3SG.PATIENT.EXTERIOR.</small>)
* '''mbu''' — exclusive or
* '''mešē''' — given that (grammaticalized use of <small>see.PRES.IND-EXP-3SG.PATIENT.EXTERIOR.</small>)
* '''najelai''' — maybe. Originally the archaic potential form of ''najalle'' (to happen). Sentence-final, requires a verb in the subjunctive mood, e.g. ''yahatite najelai'' "maybe I'll read it".
* '''nānim''' — almost; if used with nouns, requires essive case.
* '''ni''' — but (in second position)
* '''no''' — and (in complete listings, cf. ''las''); same placement as ''las''. Also used to conjoin sentences, but ''sama'' is preferred, especially when there are different subjects (triggered arguments).
* '''nyąu''' — because, for, as (cf. ''tī''); ''amyąu'' in the Classical era, i.e. the ablative of the former demonstrative ''ami''.
:: Used sentence-finally: ''aganą lā įstyāk nyąu yųlake pañcekte'' "as (s)he was hungry, (s)he started eating." In lone sentences, e.g. answers, ''tī'' is preferred: ''aganą lā tī įstyāk'' "because (s)he was hungry."
* '''paṣe''' — furthermore
* '''pū''' — if (and '''pūmbu''' "whether") - see [[Chlouvānem/Syntax#Conditional_sentences|Chlouvānem syntax § Conditional sentences]]
* '''sama''' ('''sam''' before vowels) — and (between sentences only, cf. ''las'' and ''no'')
* '''širē''' — also, too (only between sentences, cf. ''tan''). A different use of the adverb meaning "more".
* '''tadye''' — despite that (between sentences), cf. ''tatta''.
* '''tan''' — also, too; used adverbially and between sentences (where, however, ''širē'' is more common).
* '''tatta''' — despite, even though; requires a noun in the essive case or a subjunctive verb (e.g. ''gu talunīs ša tatta dadrā'' "even though you didn't come, it has been done."). Colloquially, it is also used anaphorically, instead of ''tadye''; however, it is considered bad style in formal language.
* '''varve''' — instead of; requires genitive case or subjunctive mood. Originally the locative singular of ''varva'' "form", no longer used in contemporary Chlouvānem.
** '''samvarve''' — on the other hand, whereas
* '''vivāmi''' — "too much", adverbial or postpositive, requiring genitive case in the latter usage.
* '''væse''' — while, in the meantime; "during (the)" with nouns. Requires a verb in the subjunctive mood or a noun in the essive (or, meaning-dependant, exessive or translative) case.
 
===Accompanying particles (i.e. postpositions)===
These particles can never stand alone, do not conjoin sentences, and nearly always require a particular noun case.
 
* '''bīs''' — between; from ... until, in expressions of time. Comes after both nouns in essive case: ''šurājęs nyūramyęs bīs'' "between [[Contionary:šurājah|Šurājah]] and [[Contionary:nyūramyah|Nyūramyah]]".
* '''bisikita''' — except for; requires subjunctive mood or essive case. Grammaticalized usage of <small>put_aside-EXP-IND.PERF.3.PATIENT.EXTERIOR</small>. (e.g. ''nītedarāhai lailąs bisikita nalunya upulsma'' "entrance is forbidden, except for involved people" → "authorized personnel only")
* '''dam''' — interrogative particle in polar questions, put after the verb (e.g. ''daltah vi dam?'' "is it a fish?")
* '''e''' — like. Requires essive case with nouns and subjunctive mood with verbs.
* '''ga''' — adpositive particle, used to join nouns in noun phrases (usually titles or proper names, but not honorifics), e.g. ''Līlasuṃghāṇa ga marta'' "Līlasuṃghāṇa city" or ''Tāllahārya ga maita'' "Tāllahārya river".
*: Mostly in poetry (for metrical reasons), or Archaic and Early Classical Chlouvānem prose (e.g. in the Lileṃsasarum, or many Yunyalīlti holy books), ''ga'' is used to conjoin attributive verbs to nouns, e.g. ''lei imiša ga švas'' "the animal seen by me". Already in parts of the Lileṃsasarum the decading usage of the particle in this sense is to be noted, as often it is only used to conjoin exterior verbs to nouns, but not interior ones.
* '''gu(n) ~ ša''' — negative circumposition used around verbs, e.g. ''gu yuyųlsegde ša'' "(s)he does not want to eat". The first element is ''gun'' before vowels; the ''ša'' element is omitted if the verb is attributive.
* '''lā''' — with (comitative); requires essive case (e.g. ''lilyą ñæltęs lā'' "with my sister"). The Archaic Chlouvānem form was ''lapi''.
* '''lut''' — used with expressions of time: means "ago" if used with ablative case (''nęlcų heirų lut'' "four years ago"), "for/since" if with essive case (''nęlcą heiręs lut'' "for four years").
* '''mei''' and '''go''' — "yes" and "no", used according to the polarity of the question; i.e. ''mei'' denotes the statement is true ("yes" to affirmative questions, "no" to negative questions), while ''go'' denotes the statement is false ("no" to affirmative questions, "yes" to negative questions).
* '''mæn''' — [[Chlouvānem/Syntax#Use of the topic|marks a topic which otherwise has no role in the sentence]].
* '''nali''' — benefactive marker, used with a noun in direct case; marks the benefited argument when the verb is not in benefactive-trigger voice. If used with a subjunctive verb, means "in order to", with a nuance of hope (the bare subjunctive already carries the "in order to" meaning).
* '''nin''' — after, with ablative or subjunctive (''nęlcų heirų nin'' "after four years")
* '''pa''' — on, of, concerning, on the subject of, about. Requires a direct case noun (e.g. ''vāṇatarlā pa naviṣya'' "book about botany") or a subjunctive mood verb (e.g. ''šūñjulā drētte pa nīdhāḍirdya'' "the two of us are talking about what (s)he did down there").
* '''ras''' — antibenefactive marker, used with a noun in direct case; marks the anti-benefited argument when the verb is not in antibenefactive-trigger voice. If used with a subjunctive verb, means "to avoid X".
* '''sām''' — different meanings depending on case:
:: ablative, in expressions of time: "in ... time" (at the end of a certain period), or "by": ''nęlcų heirų sām'' "in four years' time, four years for now"; ''šurājų sām'' "by [[Contionary:šurājah|Šurājah]]";
:: translative (rarely essive), in expressions of time: "in/for/until" (within, during a certain period): ''nęltin heiran sām'' "for the coming four years" (or ''nęlcą heiręs sām''); ''ājvan sām'' "until dawn";
:: dative case, with places: "until, as far as": ''līlasuṃghāṇa ṣrāvamaila ga keikom sām'' "as far as Līlasuṃghāṇa Ṣrāvamaila Station")
:: subjunctive verb: "until": ''primęlirī sām'' "until he/she/it comes back".
* '''šut''' — before, with ablative or subjunctive (''nęlcų heirų šut'' "four years before").
* '''vādį''' — without, with essive or subjunctive. Unlike English, it cannot be used anaphorically.
 
===Correlative particles===
Chlouvānem does not have correlative conjunctions as English does, because they are translated in different ways:
* English "both... and..." is most commonly translated as ''X Y no tan'' ("X, and also Y"), e.g. ''jādāh lañekaica no tan nanau draikate'' "both Jādāh and Lañekaica did that".
*: Alternatively, the forms ''X Y no peiṃsiṭ'' ("X, and the same for Y") or ''X ..., Y peiṃsiṭ'' ("X ..., and Y the same") are also widespread, e.g. ''jādāh lañekaica no peiṃsiṭ nanau draikate''; ''nāneh lei uyųla, māra peiṃsiṭ'' "I have eaten both the bread and the mango".
* English "neither... nor..." is translated by the same structures as "both... and...", but negative. In the most common usage, ''tan'' is omitted:
*: ''jādāh lañekaica no (tan) nanau gu draikate ša'' "neither Jādāh nor Lañekaica did that"; ''nāneh lei gun uyųla ša, māra peiṃsiṭ'' "I have eaten neither the bread nor the mango".
* "either... or..." is easily translated by the exclusive or (''mbu''). It is commonly only used after the second term, but it can be put after every term for emphasis:
*: ''jādāh (mbu) lañekaica mbu nanau dṛkte'' – either Jādah or Lañekaica did it. (note the singular verb)


===Emphatic particles===
===Emphatic particles===
A few particles are used (usually sentence-finally) in order to convey particular feelings of the speaker about the statement:
A few particles are used (usually sentence-finally) in order to convey particular feelings of the speaker about the statement:
* '''å''' expresses either surprise (at the beginning of a sentence) or that the fact is considered annoying (at the end), e.g. ''å viṣęe dadrāça'' "wow, (s)he's done it again!" / ''viṣęe dadrāça å'' "oh no, (s)he's done it again!"
* '''anā''' is an introductory particle (e.g. "so")
* '''å''' expresses either surprise (at the beginning of a sentence) or that the fact is considered annoying (at the end), e.g. ''å vikṣiṭ dadrāte'' "wow, (s)he's done it again!" / ''vikṣiṭ dadrā å'' "oh no, (s)he's done it again!"
* '''dā''' gives the sentence, especially a command or a proposition, an informal tone - cf. German "mal" or Italian "un po'", e.g. ''najire nanau mešute dā'' "I'll just see what happens"; ''peithos dā'' "just calm down and take a walk around here."
* '''e''' is a basic declarative particle when used word-finally, and is often used as an introduction (much like "you know, ...") or as a generic filler.
* '''e''' is a basic declarative particle when used word-finally, and is often used as an introduction (much like "you know, ...") or as a generic filler.
* '''nane''' is a tag question, e.g. ''camiyūs vali dam nane?'' "you're from Cami, aren't you?"
* '''eri''' means "even", marking a positive emphasis (e.g. ''hūnakumi dhāḍan eri dhāḍire'' "(s)he even speaks Hūnakumi<ref>Language of an ethnic minority (but titular ethnicity) in the diocese of Hūnakañjaiṭa.</ref>")
* '''noihā''' is a tag question much like ''nane'', but is used when the speaker is in doubt and/or expects a contradictory answer, e.g. ''flære dryāvetça dam noihā?'' "did I do it yesterday, or...?"
* '''gāri''' means "not even", being the opposite of ''eri'', marking a negative emphasis (e.g. ''hulābdān chlǣvānumi dhāḍan gāri dhāḍire'' "(s)he doesn't even speak correct Chlouvānem")
* '''sāṭ''' expresses the speaker's doubt about the honesty of the expressed action, e.g. ''tamie tamiu draukæ sāṭ'' "(s)he did it for me, but I don't believe that's what (s)he really wanted" or "as if (s)he really did it for me!"
* '''nā''', a generic filler (cf. "I mean"), often combined with ''e''. e.g. ''nā (e) nenēt nāṭ tarliru!'' "I mean, I already know this!"
* '''tau''' emphasizes that the fact expressed is considered obvious, and is fairly colloquial, e.g. ''lārvājuṣe mos tau'' "huh, I was at the temple, nothing else"; ''kitui vasau tau'' "I drove home [what else could I do?]"
* '''nane''' is a tag question, e.g. ''camiyūs vi dam nane?'' "you're from Cami, aren't you?"
* '''tva''' puts strong emphasis on a declarative sentence; it is fairly colloquial and not polite, and thus avoided in formal speech, e.g. ''nenėyu daudiuça tati ukulaṃça tva!'' "damn, I said I want that, shut up!"
* '''nimā''' is an introductory particle, same as ''anā''.
* '''naihā''' is a tag question much like ''nane'', but is used when the speaker is in doubt and/or expects a contradictory answer, e.g. ''lære draute dam naihā?'' "did I do it yesterday, or...?"
* '''pos''' is a filler with a meaning similar to ''tau'', but it is more properly translated as emphasizing that the speaker considers the statement as a general truth or a widely accepted thing, e.g. ''ālīce jeldegde pos'' "yeah, everybody knows (s)he acts that way/does that kind of things."
* '''sāṭ''' expresses the speaker's doubt about the honesty of the expressed action, e.g. ''tamye tamyu draukæ sāṭ'' "(s)he did it for me, but I don't believe that's what (s)he really wanted" or "as if (s)he really did it for me!"
* '''tau''' emphasizes that the fact expressed is considered obvious, and is fairly colloquial, e.g. ''lārvājuṣe ēk tau'' "huh, I was at the temple, nothing else"; ''kitui vasau tau'' "I drove home [what else could I do?]"
* '''tva''' puts strong emphasis on a declarative sentence; it is fairly colloquial and not polite, and thus avoided in formal speech, e.g. ''nenēyu daudyute tati ukulaṃte tva!'' "damn, I said I want that, shut up!"


==Derivational morphology - Kokampeithauseh maivāndarāmita==
==Derivational morphology (''vāmbeithausire maivāndarāmita'')==
Chlouvānem has an extensive system of derivational morphology, with many possibilities of deriving words from verbal roots and even from other nouns.
Chlouvānem has an extensive system of derivational morphology, with many possibilities of deriving words from verbal roots and even from other nouns.
===Compounds===
Chlouvānem, like Sanskrit, has four main types of compound words (''tadmaiva'', pl. ''tadmaivai''), called in Chlouvānem grammar ''emibądanīs'' (dvandva), ''ṭvādaradhausire tadmaiva'' (avyayībhāva), ''nīdhvakādhūs'' (tatpuruṣa), and ''kaudhvakādhūs'' (bahuvrīhi).
====Dvandva (''emibądanīs'')====
The first type of compounds is ''emibądanīs'' type (also called ''no ga tadmaiva''), corresponding to dvandva compounds. In ''emibądanais'', all words in the compound are taken with the concrete idea they represent. As hinted to by the alternative name, these compounds effectively substitute an "X Y no" (X and Y), compressing it into a single word.
: ''tēneh ukyā no'' "a branch and a trunk" → ''tēnayukyāt'' "branch and trunk"
Dvandva compounds are formed by removing the direct case ''-s'' or ''-h'' marker from the word, lengthening all resulting final vowels (i.e. for all words not ending in ''-oe, -ai, -m'', or ''-n''), and joining with saṃdhi the second word; the second word is then inflected in the dual (if the word semantically refers to two things) or in the plural (if it refers to three or more things - see the next example).
: ''tēneh nūlyai no'' "a branch and leaves" → ''tēnēnūlyai'' "branch(es) and leaves"
Note that, if the dvandva is plural, there is no indication of how many elements of each component are present:
: ''lalāruṇāt voltām no'' "two lalāruṇai (<small>DU</small>) and a sheep (<small>SG</small>)" → ''lalāruṇāvoltāk'' "lalāruṇai and sheep" (<small>PL</small>)
: ''lalāruṇai voltām no'' "lalāruṇai (<small>PL</small>) and a sheep (<small>SG</small>)" → ''lalāruṇāvoltāk'' "lalāruṇai and sheep" (<small>PL</small>)
: ''lalāruṇa voltāk no'' "a lalāruṇa (<small>SG</small>) and sheep (<small>PL</small>)" → ''lalāruṇāvoltāk'' "lalāruṇai and sheep" (<small>PL</small>)
The identification of how many individual lalāruṇai and sheep is lost in the compound, however, we know from the plural number that there must be at least three animals; otherwise, the dvandva would be dual:
: ''lalāruṇa voltām no'' "a lalāruṇa (<small>SG</small>) and a sheep (<small>SG</small>)" → ''lalāruṇāvoltīvā'' "lalāruṇai and sheep" (<small>DU</small>)
Dvandva made of three or more elements can, obviously, only be plural:
: ''lalāruṇa voltām no jorai no'' "a lalāruṇa, a sheep, and a goat" → ''lalāruṇāvoltāñjorāye'' "lalārunai, sheep, and goats"
In the most formal registers of Chlouvānem, it is not uncommon to find dvandva compounds made of several elements:
: ''lācāh kraṣṭāmita no lillāmita no demigretas no lelyēmita no'' "love, fidelity, devotion, sacrifice, and family" → ''lācākraṣṭāmitālillāmitādemigretālelyēmitai'' "love, fidelity, devotion, sacrifice, and family"
====Avyayībhāva (''ṭvādaradhausire tadmaiva'')====
Avyayībhāva compounds, in Chlouvānem ''ṭvādaradhausirāhe tadmaivai'' ("adverbial compounds"), are not as productive as the other types and, in fact, except for a few words they're mostly limited to Archaic and Classical Chlouvānem; despite being based on the latter, modern Chlouvānem does not use them productively (but see ''nīpenai'' below).<br/>These compounds generally have a first element which is a particle (or a verbal prefix), and the second element is a noun which is either left uninflected in the direct singular or, more commonly, in the two Archaic Chlouvānem adverbializing cases: the instrumental plural or the locative singular.
: ''sam + jildas'' "after + act" → *sañjildas → ''sañjilde'' "consequently"
: ''naš(e) + sṝva'' "full, complete + extent" → *nakṣṝva → ''nakṣṝve'' "as much as possible"
: ''væse + vāyam'' "while + image, form" → ''væsvāyam'' or ''væsvāyaṃrīka'' "thus, therefore"
: ''paṣ(e) + vāyam'' "beyond + image, form" → ''paṣvāyam'' "in addition, furthermore"
: ''maibu + jallas'' "enough + condition" → *maibujallas → ''maibujalle'' "as needed"
: ''nī'' + ''penai'' "within + net" → ''nīpenai'' "online" (generally considered the only modern Chlouvānem avyayībhāva)


===Nouns===
A particular kind of avyayībhāva is the ''-ṣati'' class, whose particularity derives from having a first element which is a declinable word (a possessive determiner); however, they're still adverbs and therefore uninflected:
: ''lilyā ṣati'' "my way" → ''lilyāṣati'' "from my point of view; in my opinion; my way"
: ''sāmyā ṣati'' "your way" → ''sāmyāṣati'' "from your point of view; in your opinion; your way"
 
====Tatpuruṣa (''nīdhvakādhūs'')====
Tatpuruṣa compounds (''nīdhvakādhūs'' "with meaning inside", pl. ''nīdhvakādhaus'') are likely the most common overall in Chlouvānem, and are the preferred way of crafting new words. These are endocentric compounds, the last element, the head of the compound, is modified by the previous element(s), which can be of any part of speech. Usually, the tatpuruṣa replaces genitive "X of Y", agentive "X which does Y", benefactive "X for Y", locative "X in Y", instrumental "X with Y", or sometimes copular structures "X which is (also) Y" (corresponding to Sanskrit karmadhāraya compounds) or "X made of Y".<br/>
The determining elements are generally uninflected.
: ''vāṇumi tarlā'' "study of plants" → ''vāṇatarlā'' "botany"
: ''vāṇatarlom kaminairīveyē lila'' "a person studying botany" (semantic agent) → ''vāṇatarlālila'' "botanist"
: ''mordhē cūlla'' "carriage that flies" → ''mordhacūlla'' "airplane"
: ''aṣṭre nali hatsunā'' "brush for teeth" → ''aṣṭṛhatsunā'' "toothbrush"
: ''nanāye līlta'' "path in the jungle" → ''nanailīlta'' "jungle path"
: ''nijogāp konanah'' "shooting with bow" → ''nijogākonanah'' "archery"
: ''munnęs ḍūṇā'' "a telephone which is a computer" → ''munnaḍūṇā'' "smartphone"
: ''javilenīs mayābi'' "wine made from apples" → ''javilmayābi'' "cider"
 
====Bahuvrīhi (''kaudhvakādhūs'')====
Bahuvrīhi compounds (''kaudhvakādhūs'' "with meaning outside", pl. ''kaudhvakādhaus'') are also quite common Chlouvānem words; they are exocentric compounds where none of the elements is the head of the compound, or, all elements are qualifiers. They replace structures like "[someone/something] with X which is/are Y" or "[sm/st] whose X is/are Y"; it could even be generalized to "[sm/st] whose [tatpuruṣa compound]":
: ''murkire dhānęs lā lila'' "person with black hands" → ''murkadhāna'' "Inquisitor"
: ''yųlgis nali javyęs lā dvārma'' "room with fire for food" → ''yųljavyāh'' "kitchen"<ref>Synchronically, this analysis is correct; however, this word was likely first crafted as a tatpuruṣa, i.e. "a fire for food" (''yųlgis nali javyāh''), before kitchens were rooms.</ref>
 
===Noun-forming morphemes===
'''-a''' (unstressed) or '''-ā''' (stressed) is a common derivative to make basic words from verbal roots. It does not have any fixed meaning, though it's always pretty close to the root. Nouns with the unstressed suffix and an ablautable vowel usually belong to the ablauting declension. '''ṛ''' in a root is always strengthened to middle-grade.<br/>
'''-a''' (unstressed) or '''-ā''' (stressed) is a common derivative to make basic words from verbal roots. It does not have any fixed meaning, though it's always pretty close to the root. Nouns with the unstressed suffix and an ablautable vowel usually belong to the ablauting declension. '''ṛ''' in a root is always strengthened to middle-grade.<br/>
* ''dṛ'' (to do, to make) → ''dara'' (activity)<br/>
* ''dṛ'' (to do, to make) → ''dara'' (activity)<br/>
* ''lil'' (to live) → ''lila'' (person; living thing)<br/>
* ''lil'' (to live) → ''lila'' (person; living thing)<br/>
* ''tṛl'' (to know) → ''tarlā'' (science)
* ''tṛl'' (to know) → ''tarlā'' (science)


'''-as''' is another common derivative, without fixed meaning, but usually denoting objects or things done by acting. It is used to derive positions from positional verbs.<br/>
'''-as''' is another common derivative, without fixed meaning, but usually denoting objects or things done by acting. It is used to derive positions from positional verbs.<br/>
* ''tug'' (to beat) → ''tugas'' (beat)<br/>
* ''tug'' (to beat) → ''tugas'' (beat)<br/>
* ''jlitiā (jlitim-)''  (be to the right of) → ''jlitimas'' (right)<br/>
* ''māhatyā (māhatim-)''  (be to the right of) → ''māhatimas'' (right)<br/>
* ''āntiā (āntim-)'' (be above, be on) → ''āntimas'' (part above)
* ''āntyā (āntim-)'' (be above, be on) → ''āntimas'' (part above)


'''-ūm''' is another derivative without fixed meaning, overlapping with ''-as''.<br/>
'''-ūm''' is another derivative without fixed meaning, overlapping with ''-as''.
* ''lgut'' (to buy) → ''lgutūm'' (something bought)<br/>
* ''lgut'' (to buy) → ''lgutūm'' (something bought)
* ''peith'' (to go, walk (multidirectional)) → ''peithūm'' (walk)<br/>
* ''peith'' (to go, walk (multidirectional)) → ''peithūm'' (walk)
* ''yālv'' (to be sweet (taste)) → ''yālvūm'' (sweet taste)
* ''yālv'' (to be sweet (taste)) → ''yālvūm'' (sweet taste)


'''-laukas''' is a singulative suffix, denoting either a single thing of a collective noun, or a single constituent of a broader act. Unlike the previous ones, it is most commonly applied to other nouns.<br/>
'''-(u)kāram''' is a singulative suffix, denoting either a single thing of a collective noun, or a single constituent of a broader act. Unlike the previous ones, it is most commonly applied to other nouns.<br/>In modern coinings, it is also used to denote a division of something.
* ''flun'' (to go, walk (monodirectional)) → ''fluṃlaukas'' (step)<br/>
* ''lun'' (to go, walk (monodirectional)) → ''lulkāram'' (step)
* ''lil'' (to live) (or ''liloe'' (life)) → ''lillaukas'' (moment, instant)<br/>
* ''lil'' (to live) (or ''liloe'' (life)) → ''lilukāram'' (moment, instant)
* ''daša'' (rain) → ''dašilaukas'' (raindrop)
* ''daša'' (rain) → ''dašukāram'' (raindrop)
* ''araṣa'' (atom) → ''araṣkāram'' (subatomic particle)


'''-anah''', with middle-grade ablaut if possible, denotes an act or process, or something closely related to that.<br/>
'''-anah''', with middle-grade ablaut if possible, denotes an act or process, or something closely related to that.<br/>
* ''dig'' (to pour) → ''deganah'' ((act of) pouring)<br/>
* ''dig'' (to pour) → ''deganah'' ((act of) pouring)<br/>
* ''miš'' (to see) → ''mešanah'' (sight)<br/>
* ''miš'' (to see) → ''mešanah'' (sight)<br/>
* ''lgut'' (to buy) → ''lgotanah'' (shopping)
* ''lgut'' (to buy) → ''lgotanah'' (shopping)
 
'''-na''' ('''-ra''' after ''t'' or ''d''; '''-iyāna''' after ''Cy'', '''-uvāna''' after ''Cv'') with lengthening denotes a quality.<br/>
* ''māl'' (to keep together) → ''mālna'' (union)<br/>
* ''hælvē'' (fruit) → ''šaulviyāna'' (fertility) (morphemically //hyaulviyāna//)<br/>
* ''åbdv'' (to swell, blow up) → ''åbduvāna'' (swollenness, bloatiness)
* ''blut'' (to clean) → ''blūtra'' (cleanliness)
* Lengthening is absent if the word is derived from an ''-aus-'' adjectival verb (e.g. ''chlæraus-'' ((to be) easy) → ''chlærausna'' (easiness)) and in a few exceptions.
* Inverse-ablaut roots have the reduced vowel as a prefix (e.g. ''vald'' (to (be) open) → ''uvaldra'' (opening, state of being open)).


'''-yāva''' with lengthening denotes a quality.<br/>
'''-išam''' has the same meaning as ''-na'', but it's rarer.<br/>
*  ''māl'' (to keep together) → ''mālyāva'' (union)<br/>
* ''yųlniltas'' (edible) → ''yųlniltešam'' (edibility)
* ''hælvė'' (fruit) → ''šaulvyāva'' (fertility) (morphemically //hьaulvyava//)<br/>
* ''yālv'' (to be sweet (taste)) → ''yālvišam'' (sweetness)
* ''blut'' (to clean) → ''blūtyāva'' (cleanliness)
* ''ñailūh'' (ice) → ''ñailūvišam'' (coldness)
* Lengthening is absent if the word is derived from an adjective (e.g. ''chlærausis'' (easy) → ''chlærausyāva'' (easiness)) and in a few exceptions (e.g. ''lalla'' (high) → ''lalliyāva'' (highness, superiority)). ''taugyāva'' (life) has ''au'' because it's derived from ''taugikā'' (heart) and not the bare root ''tug'' (to beat).
* ''nevy'' (to model, to give a form) → ''nevīšam'' (plastic) (This word underwent a meaning shift from "modellability" to a common material with that quality, replacing the derived form ''nevīšandhūs'' previously used. "Modellability" is ''nyaviyāna'' in contemporary Chlouvānem.)
* Inverse-ablaut roots have the reduced vowel as a prefix, much like in causative verbs (e.g. ''vald'' (to (be) open) → ''uvaldyāva'' (opening, state of being open)).


'''-išam''' has the same meaning as ''-yāva'', but it's rarer.<br/>
'''-āmita''' (''-yāmita'' when used with nouns with thematic ''e'' or ''i''), often with high-grade ablaut, is another suffix forming quality nouns, but it is often more abstract, being translatable with suffixes like English ''-ism''.<br/>
* ''yųlniltas'' (edible) → ''yųlniltešam'' (edibility)<br/>
* ''lalteh'' (friend (female)) → ''laltyāmita'' (friendship)<br/>
*  ''yālv'' (to be sweet (taste)) → ''yālvišam'' (sweetness)<br/>
* ''ēmīla'' (tiger) → ''ēmīlāmita'' (nobility (quality); most important people in society<ref>Chlouvānem society lacked a true noble class; this term applies to the most influential people in society. Tigers are considered among the noblest animals.</ref>)<br/>
* ''ñailūh'' (ice) → ''ñailuišam'' (coldness)
* ''ñæltah'' (sister (male's)) → ''ñæltāmita'' (brotherhood)


'''-āmita''', often with high-grade ablaut, is another suffix forming quality nouns, but it is often more abstract, being translatable with suffixes like English ''-ism''.<br/>
'''-tsām''' ('''-utsām''' after ''ñ, š'', and voiced stops except ''d(h)''), with middle-grade ablaut, has various generic and sometimes unpredictable meanings, though typically instrumental.
* ''çuliė'' (friend (female)) → ''çuliāmita'' (friendship)<br/>
* ''māl'' (to keep together) → ''māltsām'' (number)
*  ''ėmīla'' (tiger) → ''ėmīlāmita'' (nobility (quality); most important people in society<ref>Chlouvānem society lacked a true noble class; this term applies to the most influential people in society. Tigers are considered among the noblest animals.</ref>)<br/>
* ''lij'' (to sing) → ''lejutsām'' (choir)
*  ''ñæltah'' (sister (for a male)) → ''ñæltāmita'' (brotherhood)
* ''dhāḍ'' (to speak) → ''dhāḍutsām'' (voice)
* ''kul'' (to say) → ''kultsām'' (word) (irregular lack of middle-grade ablaut)


'''-endān''' (''-indān'' after voiced stops, and ''-innān'' after '''d'''), with middle-grade ablaut, has various generic and sometimes unpredictable meanings.<br/>
'''-rṣūs''' (''-ṛṣūs'' after a consonant) denotes a tool, namely something used in doing an action.
*  ''māl'' (to keep together) → ''mālendān'' (number)<br/>
* ''yaud-'' (to catch) → ''yaudṛṣūs'' (trap)
*  ''lij'' (to sing) → ''lejindān'' (choir)<br/>
* ''miš-'' (to see) → ''meširṣūs'' (eye <small>''(literary, rare)''</small>)<ref>Middle-grade ablaut is specific to this root.</ref>
*  ''dæld'' (to speak) → ''dældinnān'' (voice)
* ''nail-'' (to kiss) → ''nailṛṣūs'' (lips (pair of))


'''-rṣūs''' (''-ṛṣūs'' after a consonant) denotes a tool, namely something used in doing an action.<br/>
'''-gis''' denotes something used ''for'' doing an action, not always synonymous with ''-rṣūs''. ''-t-gis'' becomes ''-ñjis''.
* ''yaud'' (to catch) → ''yaudṛṣūs'' (trap)<br/>
* ''mešīn'' (eye) → ''mešīlgis'' (glasses (pair of))
* ''miš'' (to see) → ''meširṣūs'' (eye <small>''(literary, rare)''</small>)<ref>Middle-grade ablaut is specific to this root.</ref><br/>
* ''tug-'' (to beat) → ''tulgis'' (drumstick)
* ''hær'' (to kiss) → ''hærṣūs'' (lips (pair of))<br/>
* ''lgut-'' (to buy) → ''lguñjis'' (money, currency)


'''-gis''' denotes something used ''for'' doing an action, not always synonymous with ''-rṣūs''. ''-t-gis'' becomes ''-ñjis''.<br/>
'''-oe''' (with middle-grade ablaut) often denotes a result, but has lots of various meanings.
*  ''mešīn'' (eye) → ''mešīlgis'' (glasses (pair of))<br/>
* ''hal-'' (to call) → ''haloe'' (name, noun)
*  ''tug'' (to beat) → ''tulgis'' (drumstick)<br/>
* ''mbiṇḍh-'' (to go, walk (multidirectional)) → ''mbiṇḍhoe'' (development; the way something is carried out)
*  ''lgut'' (to buy) → ''lguñjis'' (money, currency)
* ''yųl-'' (to eat) → ''yąloe'' (meal)


'''-oe''' (with middle-grade ablaut) often denotes a result, but has lots of various meanings.<br/>
'''-īn''' plus middle grade-ablaut denotes a doer (roughly equivalent to English ''-er''); usually it is a person, but not always.
*  ''hal'' (to call) → ''haloe'' (name, noun)<br/>
* ''bhi-'' (to take care of; to care for) → ''bhayīn'' (someone who takes care; guardian)
*  ''peith'' (to go, walk (multidirectional)) → ''peithoe'' (development; the way something is carried out)<br/>
* ''tug-'' (to beat) → ''togīn'' (heart)
* ''yųl'' (to eat) → ''yąloe'' (meal)
* ''lgut-'' (to buy) → ''lgotīn'' (buyer)


'''-īn''' plus middle grade-ablaut denotes a doer (roughly equivalent to English ''-er''); usually it is a person, but not always.<br/>
'''-āršis''' is a mostly non-productive agentive suffix like ''-īn'', surviving in a few ancient forms as well as some colloquial pejoratives:
* ''bhi'' (to take care of; to care for) → ''bhayīn'' (someone who takes care; guardian)<br/>
* ''lęk-'' (to measure) → ''lękāršis'' (surveyor, inspector)
* ''tug'' (to beat) → ''togīn'' (heart)<br/>
* ''dhīl-'' (to be idle) → ''dhīlāršis'' (lazy ass (pejor.))
*  ''lgut'' (to buy) → ''lgotīn'' (buyer)
* ''ēreša'' (teardrop) → ''ērešāršis'' (crybaby (pejor.))


'''-āvi''' denotes something derived from X. It is also used in forming matronymics.<br/>
'''-āvi''' denotes something derived from X. It is also used in forming matronymics.
*  ''lameṣa'' (coconut palm) → ''laṃṣāvi'' (coconut)<br/>
* ''lameṣa'' (coconut palm) → ''laṃṣāvi'' (coconut)
*  ''mešanah'' (sight) → ''mešanąvi'' (knowledge)<br/>
* ''mešanah'' (sight) → ''mešanąvi'' (knowledge)
* ''yųl'' (to eat) → ''yųlāvi'' (strength <small>''(literary, rare)''</small>)
* ''yųl-'' (to eat) → ''yųlāvi'' (strength <small>''(literary, rare)''</small>)
* It is also used with surnames of writers, usually as a plurale tantum, in order to derive words meaning "the works of...", e.g. ''yukahināryāvi'' "the works of Lileikhurāvi Yukahināri ''Mæmihūmya''".


'''-āmis''', with lengthening, means "made of X".<br/>
'''-āmis''', with lengthening, means "made of X".
* ''tāmira'' (rock, stone) → ''tāmirāmis'' (stone tool)<br/>
* ''tāmira'' (rock, stone) → ''tāmirāmis'' (stone tool)
*  ''tarlā'' (knowledge, science) → ''tārlāmis'' (wisdom)<br/>
* ''tarlā'' (knowledge, science) → ''tārlāmis'' (wisdom)
*  ''lil'' (to live) → ''līlāmis'' (a blissful place)
* ''lil-'' (to live) → ''līlāmis'' (a blissful place)
* Words ending in a final long vowel (plus either ''h'', ''s'', or ''m'') do not lengthen any vowel in a previous syllable (e.g. ''ñariāh'' (mountain) → ''ñariāmis'' (mountainous area)).
* Words ending in a final long vowel (plus either ''h'', ''s'', or ''m'') do not lengthen any vowel in a previous syllable (e.g. ''ñaryāh'' (mountain) → ''ñaryāmis'' (mountainous area)).


'''-ikā''' has various meanings, often somewhat abstract, intensive, or related to highly valued things/roles.<br/>
'''-ūneh''' ('''-īneh''' after stems in -Cy-, '''-ēneh''' for nouns in ''-ē''), with middle grade ablaut (rarely strong grade), has various meanings, often somewhat abstract, intensive, or related to highly valued things/roles.
*  ''daša'' (rain) → ''dāšikā'' (monsoon) (irregular lengthening)<br/>
* ''daša'' (rain) → ''dašūneh'' (monsoon)
*  ''hær'' (to kiss) → ''hærikā'' (love <small>''(literary, rare)''</small>)<br/>
* ''nail-'' (to kiss) → ''nailūneh'' (love <small>''(literary, rare)''</small>)
* ''lalāruṇa'' (giant domestic lizard) → ''lalārauṇikā'' (knight mounting a ''lalāruṇa'')
* ''yaiva'' (all) + ''lairē'' (day) → ''yaivlairēṇeh'' (everyday life)
* ''lalāruṇa'' (giant domestic lizard) → ''lalārauṇūneh'' (knight mounting a ''lalāruṇa'')


'''-dhūs''' means "having X".<br/>
'''-dhūs''' means "having X".
*  ''dara'' (activity) → ''daradhūs'' (verb)<br/>
* ''dara'' (activity) → ''daradhūs'' (verb)
*  ''šaṇṭrās'' (field, soil) → ''šaṇṭrādhūs'' (countryside)<br/>
* ''šaṇṭrās'' (field, soil) → ''šaṇṭrādhūs'' (countryside)
*  ''hælvė'' (fruit) → ''hælvidhūs'' (fruiting tree; <small>literary:</small> pregnant woman)
* ''hælvē'' (fruit) → ''hælvidhūs'' (fruiting tree; <small>literary:</small> pregnant woman)


'''-bān''' and '''-ūrah''' are two roughly equivalent suffixes used for locations. The first one is generally used after vowels, the second after consonants, but it's no strict rule.<br/>
'''-bān''' and '''-ūrah''' are two roughly equivalent suffixes used for locations. The first one is generally used after vowels, the second after consonants, but it's no strict rule.
* ''hælvė'' (fruit) → ''hælvėbān'' (orchard)<br/>
* ''hælvē'' (fruit) → ''hælvēbān'' (orchard)
*  ''lil'' (to live) → ''lilūrah'' (world)<br/>
* ''lil'' (to live) → ''lilūrah'' (world)
* ''peith'' (to go, to walk (multidirectional)) → ''peithūrah'' (passage)
* ''peith'' (to go, to walk (multidirectional)) → ''peithūrah'' (passage)


'''-(l)āṇa''' forms a true collective noun:<br/>
'''-(l)āṇa''' forms a true collective noun:
* ''çuliė'' (friend (female)) → ''çulielāṇa'' (group of friends)
* ''lalteh'' (friend (female)) → ''laltelāṇa'' (group of friends)
* ''jīma'' (character, symbol, letter) → ''jīmalāṇa'' (writing system)
* ''jīma'' (character, symbol, letter) → ''jīmalāṇa'' (writing system)
* ''maiva'' (word) → ''maivalāṇa'' (lexicon)
* ''maiva'' (word) → ''maivalāṇa'' (lexicon)


'''-(l)ænah''' denotes a tree or a plant having a certain fruit<ref>As for all living things, being Calémere a different planet, the given translation is the one of the closest equivalent on Earth.</ref>.<br/>
'''-(l)ænah''' denotes a tree or a plant having a certain fruit<ref>As for all living things, being Calémere a different planet, the given translation is the one of the closest equivalent on Earth.</ref>.
*  ''haiçah'' (pineapple) → ''haiçænah'' (pineapple tree)<br/>
*  ''haisah'' (pineapple) → ''haisænah'' (pineapple tree)
*  ''maʔika'' (uncooked rice) → ''maʔikænah'' (rice plant)<br/>
*  ''maɂika'' (uncooked rice) → ''maɂikænah'' (rice plant)
*  ''šikālas'' (prickly pear) → ''šikālænah'' (prickly pear cactus)
*  ''šikālas'' (prickly pear) → ''šikālænah'' (prickly pear cactus)


'''-yus''' (''-yūs'' if there are only short syllables) is used with toponyms and is one of the most common ways to form denonymal nouns. As many of the nouns these words are derived from are proper nouns and of non-Chlouvānem origin, there are often irregular formations, e.g. using only a part of the original word.<br/>
'''-yūs''' is used with toponyms and is one of the most common ways to form demonyms. As many of the nouns these words are derived from are proper nouns and of non-Chlouvānem origin, there are often irregular formations, e.g. using only a part of the original word.
* ''Līlasuṃghāṇa'' → ''līlasuṃghāṇyus''<br/>
* ''Līlasuṃghāṇa'' → ''līlasuṃghāṇyūs''
* ''Cami'' → ''camiyūs''<br/>
* ''Cami'' → ''camiyūs''
* ''Galiākina'' → ''Galiākyus''
* ''Ajāɂilbādhi'' → ''ajāɂilbādhyūs''


===Verbs===
'''-mana''' ('''-ana''' after ''CC'' clusters) is often found with the meaning of "that has to be X"; usually, a synonymous word may be formed by ''-s'' derivation from a necessitative stem, but some ''-mana'' words have their own specialized meaning:
The main denominal verb-forming suffix is '''-ora-''', used mainly with the meaning of "to make/create X" or "to have X":
* ''ṭvur-'' (to believe) → ''ṭvurmaṇa'' (miracle)
* ''āmaya'' (collection) → ''āmayorake'' (to collect)
* ''miš-'' (to see) → ''mišmana'' (attraction) (also ''memikṣūs'')
* ''yuiça'' (sound) → ''yuiçorake'' (to make a sound)
* ''tṛl-'' (to know, understand) → ''tṛlmana'' (rule) (not synonymous with ''tartṛlsūs'', meaning "needed knowledge, prerequisite")
* ''çuliė'' (friend (f)) → ''çuliyorake'' (to befriend, to become friends with)


'''-ьeiš-''' (alternating with preconsonantal '''-ьeiki-''') forms a verb with the meaning of "to make something X(-like)" or something related to using X:
'''-yai''' (often with lengthening) forms nouns with the meaning of "pertaining to", generally applied to nouns denoting inanimate (but usually concrete) concepts. Such nouns are found in literature with an anaphorical use.<br/>It is commonly found in Chlouvānem surnames. In chemistry, it denotes binary compounds, usually with a dvandva stem.
* ''raikas'' (smoke) → ''raiceiške'' (to smoke food)
* ''vīhatam'' (farm) → ''vīhātyai'' (farmer; farm's)
* ''lallāmita'' (future) → ''lallāmitieiške'' (to plan)
* ''svāṣṭa'' (armor) → ''svāṣṭyai'' (armored knight)
* ''brausa'' (sainthood) → ''brausieiške'' (to sanctify, hallow)
* ''bilumbida'' (sodium) + ''talyelīm'' (chlorine) → ''bilumbītalyelīyai'' (sodium chloride)


Positional prefixes can be used to derive new, more specific verbs, from other ones; [[Chlouvānem#Positional_prefixes_as_derivational_affixes|see the section under ''Positional verbs'' for more.]]
'''-ceh''', '''-cænah''', and '''-cañīh''' (all often with palatalization of the last consonant) are three different (but with roughly the same meaning) diminutive-forming suffixes; some of them have developed distinct meanings. They can also be compounded, as in '''-cæñ-cañīh''':
* ''nūrya'' (child) → ''nūricænah'' (little child)
* ''ēmīla'' (tiger) → ''ēmīlcañīh'' (cat)
* ''pǣka'' (taste)  → ''pǣcicænah'' (hors d'œuvre, entrée)


Prefixes are a common way to form many specific forms of verbs, especially related to how much or how an action is carried out. As all of these derive verbs from other verbs, only the root is given in examples:<br/>
Similarly, '''-rarā''' (a likely Laiputaši borrowing) is used as an augmentative, but is only found in informal styles.
'''ñavu-''' ('''ñau-''' before a nasal, '''v''' or '''r''') forms verbs meaning "a bit more than needed". Verbs whose root has ''ṛ'' as the main vowel do not ablaut and always have middle-grade ''ar'', except if there is another prefix (see second example):
* ''dårṣa'' (cool, nice) → ''dårṣararā'' (fantastic)
* ''dṛ-'' (to do) → ''ñavudar-'' (to do something a bit more than needed)
* ''jāmṝṣa'' (dam) → ''jāmṝṣararā'' (a huge dam)
** ''āndṛ-'' (to build, create) → ''ñavāndṛ-'' (to build/create a bit more than needed)
* ''alūs'' (bottle) → ''alūrarā'' (a big bottle)
* ''vald-'' (to open) → ''ñauvald-'' (to open a bit more than needed)
* ''flun-'' (to go, walk (monod.)) → ''ñavuflun-'' (to walk somewhat further ahead than needed)


'''vīvai-''' forms verbs meaning "too much"; verbs with ''ṛ'' always have ''ar'' and are non-ablauting:
===Verb-forming morphemes===
* ''dṛ-'' (to do) → ''vīvaidar-'' (to do something too much)
Denominal verbs, in Chlouvānem, are not formed with derivational suffixes; a "light verb" is attached to the semantic root instead; the semantic root remains invariable but the light verb is conjugated (as a prefixed one). The light verb used are especially ''dṛke'' (to do, make), but also ''jilde'' (to do an action), ''jānake'' (to feel (physical)), and ''gyake'' (to be). Some examples:
* ''pugl-'' (to sleep) → ''vīvaipugl-'' (to sleep too much)
* ''āmaya'' (collection) → ''āmayadṛke'' (to collect)
* ''flun-'' (to go, walk (monod.)) → ''vīvaiflun-'' (to walk too much ahead)
* ''språma'' (glue) → ''språñjilde'' (to glue)
* ''jålkha'' (cold (sensation)) → ''jålkhajānake'' (to be/feel cold)
* ''ñailūh'' (ice) → ''tæñailūgyake'' (to freeze) (note the ''tæ-'' dynamic prefix).


'''trān-''' ('''trā-''' before voiced stops, nasals, or '''r'''; it combines with a following ''y'' to form ''trāñ-'') forms verbs of iterative aspect, or "to keep X-ing"; verbs with ''ṛ'' always have ''ar'' and are non-ablauting:
The other basic derived formation is the frequentative verb, formed with reduplication (with a long vowel) and '''-ve(y)-''' (''-vi(y)-'' in the past tense<ref>Ex.: ''dṝdaveyute'' "I repetitively do" vs. ''dṝdaviyaute'' "I repetitively did"</ref>). ''-ṛ'' reduplicates as ''ṝ'', but becomes ''a'' in the root.<br/>Due to the common use of this form in modern Chlouvānem, some grammarians consider it as an inflectional category instead of a derivation. Note though that for motion verbs only multidirectional ones have a frequentative form (with iterative meaning); the multidirectionals already act as frequentative forms of the monodirectionals.
* ''dṛ-'' (to do) → ''trādar-'' (to keep doing something)
* ''dṛ-'' (to do) → ''dṝdave-'' (to repetitively do)
* ''yųl-'' (to eat) → ''trāñųl-'' (to keep eating)
* ''na-jaly-'' (to happen) → ''najājlive-'' (to keep happening; to regularly happen, to occur)<ref>The verb "to happen" does not exist as an iterative.</ref> (''jaly-'' reduplicates as ''jā-jli-'', with the ''i'' from the root ''y'').
* ''khlu-'' (to search, look for) → ''trālkhlu-'' (to keep searching)
* ''-jaly-'' (to be) + various prefixes → ''bījājlive-'' (to cease to be); ''galajājlive-'' (to remain in one place; to visit; to keep being)
* ''tvorg-'' (to fear) → ''totvargve-'' (to fear over and over again) (''tvo-'' reduplicates as ''to-'' instead of ''tva-'').
* ''låvy-'' (to slip) → ''laulavive-'' (to slip around here and there) (''-å-'' reduplicates as ''-au-'' and becomes ''a'' in the root).
Note that ''nairīveke'' conjugates as a frequentative verb, but is not frequentative and does not have frequentative forms.<br/>
Frequentative perfect stems have the ablauted vowel in the reduplication and a long one in the root (cf. ''miš-'', bare frequentative ''mīmišve-'', perfect frequentative ''memīšve-''); both vowels are long for non-ablauted stems (cf. ''nāmv-'', ''nānamve-'', ''nānāmve-'').<br/>
Inverse ablauting roots have similar rules: the bare frequentative uses the reduplication of the nonreduced root and the reduced vowel in the root itself (''vald-'' → va-uld-ve- → ''voldve-''); the frequentative perfect is like the normal frequentative of other verbs, with the long vowel in the reduplication only (''vald-'' → ''vāvaldve-'').


Reduplication (with one coda consonant and basic vowel) with diachronic lengthening and '''-ve(y)-''' (''-vi(y)-'' in the past tense<ref>Ex.: ''dadarveyuça'' "I repetitively do" vs. ''dadarviyauça'' "I repetitively did"</ref>) forms frequentative verbs.<br/>Due to the common use of this form in modern Chlouvānem, some grammarians consider it as an inflectional category instead of a derivation. Note though that this does not apply for motion verbs, as the multidirectional ones are already understood to be frequentative.
In many cases, frequentatives are used with an iterative meaning; the latter, if needed for disambiguation, may be specified by the particle ''dīdān''.
* ''dṛ-'' (to do) → ''dadarve-'' (to repetitively do)
* ''na-gya-'' (to happen) → ''nagigyave-'' (to keep happening)<ref>The verb "to happen" does not exist as an iterative.</ref>
* ''tvorg-'' (to fear) → ''tvartveirgve-'' (to fear over and over again)


'''yavi-''' ('''yav-''' before '''y''') forms resultative verbs, with the meaning of "to finish X-ing" or "to X everything":
====Adjectival verbs====
* ''dṛ-'' (to do) → ''yavidṛ'' (to finish, complete (transitive))
Adjectival verbs, however, do have some ways to be derived from other parts of speech.
* ''yųl-'' (to eat) → ''yavyųl'' (to finish eating; to eat everything)
* ''mūmik-'' (to dance) → ''yavimūmik'' (to finish dancing; <small>''idiomatic:''</small> to start working, to get back to work)


'''tæ(m)-''' forms mainly dynamic verbs from stative ones (being often synonymous with their causative patientive forms) and from adjectives. It is also used with nouns, forming verbs with the meaning of "to become a(n) X":
'''-ūk-ke''' is the most common adjectival verb-forming suffix, denoting something strictly related to an object or a verb. Note that they are all thematic verbs, even if their infinitive is contracted (Archaic Chl. ''-ūkake'' → Classical and Modern ''-ūkke''). Often they are interchangeable with the genitive form of the noun they derived from:
* ''murkas'' (black) → ''tæmurk-'' (to become black; <small>''causative:''</small> to make/paint something black)
* ''avyāṣa'' (time) → ''avyāṣūkke'' ([to be] temporal)
* ''jāyim'' (girl) → ''tæjāyim-'' (to become a girl)
* ''chlærūm'' (light) → ''chlærūkke'' (of the light)
* ''būṃṣ-'' (to be dry; <small>''causative:''</small> to dry something) → ''tæmbūṃṣ-'' (to become dry; <small>''causative:''</small> to dry something (rarely used))
* ''daša'' (rain) → ''dašūkke'' (rainy, concerning rain)

'''-uy-a-ke''' is a rarer variant of ''-ūk-ke'', most commonly found for qualities related to people, but not exclusively (see third example):
* ''jāyim'' (girl) → ''jāyimuyake'' (girly, girlish)
* ''saṃhāram'' (boy) → ''saṃhāruyake'' (boyish)
* ''irūtākalam'' (atom) → ''irūtāruyake'' (atomic) (the ''-r'' is etymological from Ancient Kūṣṛmāṭhi)


'''nare-''' ('''nar-''' before another prefix) forms verbs with applicative meanings:
'''-aus-a-ke''' (rarely '''-us-a-ke''') forms adjectival verbs related to a quality that is applied to some object, but more abstractly related than those formed with ''-ūkke''; sometimes they are only figurative:
* ''pugl-'' (to sleep) → ''narepugl-'' (to sleep during something)
* ''chlærūm'' (light) → ''chlærausake'' (easy)
* ''yųl-'' (to eat) → ''nareyųl-'' (to have a meal with someone, to go eating with someone)
* ''pāṇi'' (side) → ''pāṇyausake'' (peripheral, less important)
* ''ta-flun-'' (to arrive on foot) → ''nartaflun-'' (to reach a place on foot)
* ''namęlь'' (to make an effort, to apply oneself, to work harder) → ''namęliausake'' (Stakhanovite)
* Nouns ending in ''-ā'' typically only add '''-sь-''' (''-si-ke''):
** ''laikā'' (innocence) → ''laikāsike'' (innocent)


'''min-''' forms transitive verbs from intransitive (mostly dynamic) ones:
'''-nilt-a-ke''' translates English ''-able'', and the circumfix '''uṣ- -niltake''' translates to "un- -able" or, sometimes, "difficult to X". The rare '''ñǣ- -niltake''' translates as "easy to X".<br/>The ''uṣ-'' prefix has the allomorphs ''ū-'' (before voiced stops), ''uš-'' (before ''c'' and ''ch''), and ''u-'' (before ''l''+consonant); ''uṣ-'' plus any sibilant becomes ''ukṣ-''.
* ''pūn-'' (to work) → ''mimpūn-'' (to work on something)
* ''tṛl'' (to know, understand) → ''tṛlniltake'' (understandable) → ''uṣṭṛlniltake'' (uncomprehensible; difficult to understand) / ''ñǣtṛlniltake'' (easy to understand)
* ''gya-'' (to be) → ''milgya-'' (to experience)
* ''yųl'' (to eat) → ''yųlniltake'' (edible) → ''uṣyųlniltake'' (unedible)
* ''peith-'' (to go (multidirectional)) → ''mimpeith-'' (to walk on foot while staying inside a certain place)
* ''lgut'' (to buy) → ''lgutniltake'' (buyable) → ''ulgutniltake'' (not buyable)


===Adjectives===
'''-ṣeni-ke''' (morph. ''seny-ke'', all root verbs) translates "having X as a quality", usually added to nouns, or "X-like" in some cases; it may be synonymous with the ''-dhūs'' derivative. ''u-'' and ''i-'' stems (thus ''-uh'', ''-ih'', ''-us''...) lengthen that vowel before the suffix.
Adjectives are formed from either nouns or verbs by using the following suffixes: All terms are given here in citation form (dragon singular)
* ''rahēlah'' (health) → ''rahēlṣenike'' (healthy)
* ''nakṣuma'' (music) → ''nakṣuṃṣenike'' (having a musical talent)
* ''migmairuh'' (emerald) → ''migmairūṣenike'' (emeraldine, emerald-like)


'''-ūkas''' is the most common adjective-forming suffix, denoting something strictly related to an object or a verb. Often they are interchangeable with the genitive form of the noun they derived from:
====Compound verbs====
* ''avyāṣa'' (time) → ''avyāṣūkas'' (temporal)
Chlouvānem uses compound verbs as its main method of deriving verbs from nouns. Such "verbs" are actually a nominal root which does not decline followed by a conjugating verb. The verb used influences the meaning that the compound will have:
* ''chlærūm'' (light) → ''chlærūkas'' (of the light)
* ''dṛke'' (to do) is probably the most commonly used, and may have a meaning of using something (denoted by the nominal root) to treat something else (cf. ''bikṣurdṛke'' "to deodorize" < ''bikṣurga'' "deodorant"), of moving or acting like the nominal root (''yināṃdṛke'' "to protect" < ''yinām'' "protection"), or of simply having or creating something (''āmayadṛke'' "to collect" < ''āmaya'' "collection").
* ''daša'' (rain) → ''dašūkas'' (rainy, concerning rain)
* ''kitte'' (to put) is used for a meaning of addition of the nominal root or its characteristics to something (cf. ''nāmṛkitte'' "to add salt" < ''nāṃra'' "salt).
* ''męlike'' (to give) is sometimes used with the same meaning as ''kitte'' (cf. ''junyāmęlike'' "to plant flowers" < ''junyā'' "flower").
* ''jilde'' (to act) is used for subjects "emitting" or "giving off" something (cf. ''lāhajilde'' "to judge" < ''lāham'' "judgement"), also for subjects possessing (''dhokajilde'' "to mean" < ''dhokam'' "meaning") or undergoing something (''lañšijilde'' "to marry" < ''lañši'' (arch.) braid, wedding), and also for weather phenomena<ref>Rain, specifically, is more commonly used as the subject of the verb ''buñjñake'', meaning "to run" for water (in Chl. rain runs just like a river does).</ref> (''dašajilde'' "to rain" < ''daša'' "rain").
* ''gyake'' (to be) is used, like in one meaning of ''dṛke'', for moving or acting like the nominal root. Typically, it is more for states than actions (the prototypical and most common example is ''pṛšcāṃgyake'' "to be pleasing" < ''pṛšcām'' "something pleasing"<ref>The word ''pṛšcām'' alone is almost never used in contemporary Chlouvānem.</ref>).
* ''jānake'' (to feel) has a meaning partially overlapping with ''jalle'' (and ''dṛke''), particularly marking the "feeling" of a (usually uncontrollable) condition (''jålkhajānake'' "to be cold" < ''jålkha'' "cold").
* ''milke'' (to take) has a varied range of meaning: getting or gathering something (''vīrādhmilke'' "to adopt" < ''vīrādhen'' "orphan";  ''mailьlut(a)milke'' "to take advantage" < ''mailьluta'' "advantage"), also the opposite, taking something away (cf. ''rantamilke'' "to peel (fruits)" < ''rantas'' "peel"), and also overlapping partially with ''kitte'' and ''męlike'' in marking the addition of something or, more, properly, the act of bringing something (''prātamilke'' "to get windy; (''figur.'') to accelerate" < ''prātas'' "wind" - cf. ''prātajilde'' "to be windy").
* ''bismilke'' (to take away) and ''bīdṛke'' (to destroy) are used, more commonly than ''milke'', for the meaning of removing or taking something away: (''ssūbismilke'' "to calm down" < ''ssūgis'' "something that worries"; ''lilembīdṛke'' "(''euphem.'') to kill" < ''liloe'' "life").


'''-ausis''' (rarely '''-usis''') forms adjectives related to a quality that is applied to some object, but more abstractly related than those formed with ''-ūkas-''; sometimes they are only figurative:
Sometimes, the most meaningful element of a compound verb is not otherwise found as a standalone word in Chlouvānem, as in ''pṛšcāṃjalle'' (to like), or ''hārlājmęlike'' (to prefer).
* ''chlærūm'' (light) → ''chlærausis'' (easy)
* ''pāṇi'' (side) → ''pāṇyausis'' (peripheral, less important)
* ''namęlь'' (to make an effort, to apply oneself, to work harder) → ''namęliausis'' (Stakhanovite)


'''-niltas''' translates English ''-able'', and the circumfix '''uṣ- -niltas''' translates to "un- -able" or, sometimes, "difficult to X". The rare '''ñæi- -niltas''' translates as "easy to X".<br/>The ''uṣ-'' prefix has the allomorphs ''ū-'' (before voiced stops), ''uš-'' (before ''c'' and ''ch''), and ''u-'' (before ''l''+consonant); ''uṣ-'' plus any sibilant becomes ''ukṣ-''.
===Prefixes===
* ''tṛl'' (to know, understand) → ''tṛlniltas'' (understandable) → ''uṣṭṛlniltas'' (uncomprehensible; difficult to understand) / ''ñæitṛlniltas'' (easy to understand)
'''Prefixes''' are a major part of Chlouvānem derivational morphology. Most of them are the same as for positional and motion verbs — [[Chlouvānem#Positional_verbs|for their formation and use,]] [[Chlouvānem#Origin_prefixes|see the related section.]] Most prefixes are used with verbs, and are found with nouns only in derived forms; some of them, however, can be used also or exclusively with nouns and adjectives. Prefixes derive usually from Proto-Lahob, but a few chiefly nominal ones are from Ancient Kūṣṛmāthi words.<br/>
* ''yųl'' (to eat) → ''yųlniltas'' (edible) → ''uṣyųlniltas'' (unedible)
Here follows a complete list of '''all''' prefixes used in Chlouvānem and their meaning. When two prefixes are divided by a wave dash, the first is ''lative'' and the second is ''ablative''; <small>NOM</small> marks meanings of nouns derived with that prefix.
* ''lgut'' (to buy) → ''lgutniltas'' (buyable) → ''ulgutniltas'' (not buyable)


'''-ṣenis''' translates "having X as a quality", usually added to nouns, or "X-like" in some cases; it may be synonymous with the ''-dhūs'' derivative. ''u-'' and ''i-'' stems (thus ''-uh'', ''-ih'', ''-us''...) lengthen that vowel before the suffix.
====Positional and motional prefixes====
* ''rahėlah'' (health) → ''rahėlṣenis'' (healthy)
* ''ta- 〜 tų-'' - generic direction

* ''nakṣuma'' (music) → ''nakṣuṃṣenis'' (having a musical talent)
* ''ān- 〜 yana-'' - on, above
* ''meimairuh'' (emerald) → ''meimairūṣenis'' (emeraldine, emerald-like)
* ''šu- 〜 šer-'' - under, below
* ''ṭvā- 〜 ṭus-'' - between
* ''gin- 〜 ją-'' - among
* ''nī- 〜 ani-'' - within/from within inside
* ''ū(b)- 〜 yom-'' - close to
* ''bis- 〜 bara-'' - far, away
* ''tad-'' <small>(''tata-'' before '''l''')</small> ''〜 tasi-'' - attached to; against
* ''įs- 〜 įṣu-'' - hanging
* ''na(ñ)- 〜 nani-'' - inside
* ''kau- 〜 kuvi-'' - outside
* ''viṣ- 〜 vyeṣa-'' - opposite; somewhere else
* ''kami- 〜 kara-'' - around
* ''pri- 〜 prā-'' - behind
* ''mai- 〜 mīram-'' - in front of
* ''vai- 〜 vǣ-'' - in a corner; bordering; at the limit
* ''sāṭ- 〜 ṣlū-'' - next to; along; on the side of
* ''lā(d)- 〜 lo(d)-'' - in the center of
* ''vyā- 〜 veši-'' - left
* ''māha- 〜 mege-'' - right
* ''pid-'' - facing (positional only)
* ''nal-'' - towards the center; inwards; convergent movement
* ''vād-'' - away from the center; outwards; divergent movement


The suffixes '''-apus'''/'''-epus''' or '''-ækṣasis'''/'''-īkṣasis''' are sometimes considered, as far as the grammar of everyday Chlouvānem is concerned, ways to derive adjectives from other adjectives. [[Chlouvānem#Comparatives_and_superlatives|As seen in the section about adjectives,]] these are actually the endings of synthetic comparatives and superlatives, which are obsolete in modern Chlouvānem except from the most formal registers.<br/>
====Motional prefixes====
Their classification as derivational suffixes is sometimes made starting from a few forms which have got an additional meaning (often with notable semantic shifts, and usually starting from a single use later generalized) apart from the "more/most X", and they're nowadays used with that meaning (with the comparative being made analytically with ''nanū'').
* ''be- 〜 ter-'' - along the surface
* ''kāmilas'' (blue) → ''kāmilapus'' (healthy) ("blue" is used also in the sense of English "green" as "environmental-friendly"; the semantic shift here has its origin in place descriptions, with "bluer" places being less urbanized and less polluted ones; later the "healthy" meaning was generalized)
* ''gala- 〜 hali-'' - through, across
* ''tāmirūkas'' (rocky) → ''tāmirūkapus'' (difficult)
* ''naš-'' - completely, until the end; <small>NOM:</small> omni-, pan-, entirely
* ''huliāyausis'' (glowing in the dark; visible as the moon) → ''huliāyausīkṣasis'' (recognizable, easy to recognize)
* ''vod-'' - avoiding
* ''paṣ-'' - ahead, beyond; also <small>NOM:</small> further, again, re-
* ''sam-'' - movement to the following place/person/object in a set; <small>NOM:</small> after, post-


===General prefixes===
====Verbal-only prefixes====
''[examples in this section to be added soon]''
* ''tæ(m)-'' - inceptive/inchoative
* ''raš-'' - to do something a bit more than needed (''ral-'' or ''rar-'' before voiced consonants)
* ''yā-'' - too much
* ''iva-'' - completely, also intensive
* ''nare-'' - applicative (''nar-'' before another prefix, cf. the common form ''narta-'' for "to reach"-verbs)
* ''min-'' - transitivizer of intransitive verbs


Some prefixes may be used with all parts of speech. Most of them derive from Ancient Kūṣṛmāthi words, or from otherwise lost Proto-Lahob ones.
====Other prefixes====
* ''o-'' - before, pre-, proto-, preceding (''os-'' before vowels)
* ''tail-'' - multi-, pluri-
* ''emib(u)-'' or ''tūt(u)-'' - one, mono-, uni-, homo-
* ''lani-'' - same, fellow
* ''vre-'' - bad
* ''demi-'' - self-


'''o-''' ('''os-''' before a vowel) indicates "pre", "proto-", something that precedes something else:
===Specific terms===
* ''dældā'' (language) → ''odældā'' (proto-language)
Derivational terms considered "specific" are those mostly found in certain jargons. Some of these are applied directly to a Lällshag root instead of a Chlouvānem one:
*
 
'''sam-''' means "after-", or "post-", and is nearly the exact antonym of ''o-'':
* ''dīd-'' (to know someone) → ''saṃdīd-'' (to discover something about someone after that would have been relevant/once that person is not anymore part of someone's life)
* ''yartām'' ([early] morning) → ''samyartām'' (late morning)
* ''dįba'' (kick) → ''saṃdįba'' (pain felt after receiving a kick)
 
'''tailь-''' roughly corresponds to "multi-" or "pluri-":
* ''milgya-'' (to experience something) → ''tailьmilgya-'' (to have a déjà-vu)
* ''daradhūs'' (verb) → ''tailьgirdaradhūs'' (multidirectional verb)
* ''vaḍa'' (part) → ''tailьvaḍausis'' (complex)
 
'''lail-''' ('''laili-''') and '''tūt-''' ('''tūtu-''') both mean "one", "mono-", "uni-", "homo-". The first prefix is of native Chlouvānem origin, the other is Ancient Kūṣṛmāthi:
*
 
'''paṣ-''' means "further", "more", or "again", "re-":
* ''dhokam'' (meaning) → ''paṣṭhokam'' (hyperonym)
* ''dīd-'' (to know someone) → ''paṣadīd-'' (to get to know someone better)
* ''ṣådh-'' (to be big [bodily]) → ''pakṣådh-'' (to be overweight)
 
'''naš-''' means "entirely", "completely", "omni-", "pan-", or can also have an intensive meaning (though '''cam-''' is more common for the latter):


'''lani-''' means "same":
Used in politics and/or the arts:
* ''cerṇūṣah'' (homeland) → ''lanicerṇūṣīn'' (fellow countryman)
* '''-nātra''' has two main meanings: ''-ism'' (as in a doctrine) in a political sense, and ''-esque'' in the arts, cf. ''yaivcārṇātra'' "communism" (< ''yaiva'' "all", ''cār-'' "to have"), or ''lānūṣurṇātra'' "in the style of writer Naryejūramāvi Lānūṣurah ''Mæmihomah''".
* ''pūnīn'' (worker) → ''lanipūnīn'' (colleague)
** '''-nātryūs''' (← ''-nātra-yūs'') is the term for a person that follows such a doctrine or style, cf. ''yaivcārṇātryūs'' "communist"; ''lānūṣurṇātryūs'' "someone whose writing is Lānūṣuraësque".
** Note that ''lija'' and ''lejīn'' (lit. "song" and "singer") were formerly alternatives to these. They notably remain in ''nāɂahilūṃlija'' "politico-religious doctrine inspired by Great Inquisitor Kælahīmāvi Nāɂahilūma ''Martayinām''; Yunyalīlti religious extremism" and ''nāɂahilūṃlejīn'', as well as in ''arāmilija'' "pacifism".


'''vād-''' means "various", "varied", also "down":
Used for medical terminology:
* ''kul-'' (to say) → ''vāgdul-'' (to vote)
* '''-gulas''' usually translates "-philia" or "-mania", particularly in medical contexts, e.g. ''ryukagulas'' "masochism" from ''ryuka'' "pain".
 
** '''-gulašålyē''' is the related term for someone who has that (thus "-philiac" or "-maniac"), e.g. ''ryukagulašålyē'' "masochist".
'''vre-''' means "bad":
* '''-rauga''' is a generic term used in medicine for names of illnesses or conditions affecting health, e.g. ''gåtnirauga'' "obesity" from ''gåtnake'' "to vomit"; ''skañcrauga'' "insomnia" from ''skañcake'' (to be awake at night).
 
** '''-raugotis''' is the term for someone affected by a ''-rauga'', e.g. ''skañcraugotis'' "insomniac".
'''demi-''', meaning "self", is sometimes counted as a prefix, but is often considered a compound with ''demi'', the reflexive pronoun:
* '''-ītsun''' is a rarer alternative to ''-ræṣka'', e.g. ''vrayobulītsun'' "asplenia" (''vre-'' (bad) + ''obula'' (spleen)), or ''lagukītsun'' "paralysis" (the latter with the root of Lällshag ''gahoke'' (still)).
* ''tadmālas'' (limitation, constrainedness, control) → ''demitadmālas'' (self-limitation (one of the main Yunyalīlti virtues))
** '''-ītsunis''' is the corresponding term for affected organisms, e.g. ''vrayobulītsunis'' "aspleniac", ''lagukītsunis'' "paralyzed".
* ''kaudaranah'' (kill) → ''demikaudaranah'' (suicide)
* '''-måkṣan''' is used for inflammatory diseases, cf. "-itis", like ''ṇīṭmåkṣan'' (dermatitis) or ''āḍhyāsnūlimåkṣan'' (meningitis).
* ''kamidīdeh'' (better knowledge of someone) → ''demikamidīdeh'' (self-knowledge (another Yunyalīlti virtue))
 
===Specific terms===
Derivational terms considered "specific" are those mostly found in certain jargons. Some of these are applied directly to an Ancient Kūṣṛmāthi root instead of a Chlouvānem one:


* '''-gaṇūh''' usually translates "-philia" or "-mania", particularly in medical contexts, e.g. ''ryukagaṇūh'' "masochism" from ''ryuka'' "pain".
====Compounding====
** '''-gaṇūvima''' is the related term for someone who has that (thus "-philiac" or "-maniac"), e.g. ''ryukagaṇūvima'' "masochist".
* '''tarlā''' (knowledge) is used as the head element of compounds, with a meaning like ''-logy'' in English. Sometimes the meaning is only abstracted (see second example) or has changed with time (see third example):
* '''-rauga''' is a generic term used in medicine for names of illnesses or conditions affecting health, e.g. ''tukoṃrauga'' "obesity" from A.Kūṣṛmāthi ''tukkom'' "fat"; ''vrayegårlauga'' "dysphagia" (note dissimilation of -rr-) from ''vre-'' (bad) and ''egåram'' (stomach).
** ''babhrām'' (land) → ''babhrātarlā'' (geography)
** '''-raugotis''' is the term for someone affected by a ''rauga'', e.g. ''tukoṃraugotis'' "obese", ''vrayegårlaugotis'' "dysphagic".
** ''smoḍ-'' (to count, to enumerate) → ''smoṇḍarlā'' (mathematics)
** ''ladragyalah'' (inn) → ''ladragyaltarlā'' (economics)


===Compounding===
==See also==
* [[Chlouvānem/Syntax|Chlouvānem syntax]]
* [[Chlouvānem/Positional and motion verbs|Chlouvānem positional and motion verbs]]
* [[Chlouvānem/Exterior and interior verbs|Chlouvānem exterior and interior verbs]]


== Notes ==
== Notes ==


[[Category:Chlouvānem]]
[[Category:Chlouvānem]]
Lili21
8,540

edits

Retrieved from "https://linguifex.com/wiki/Special:MobileDiff/71142...235114"